Billing

Billing cannot be Release to Accounting
This SAP message will appear if the system is unable to find the G/L codes match from the configuration in transaction VKOA No account is specified in item 0000001001 Message no. F5 670 Diagnosis No account was specified for account type "S" in item "0000001001" of the FI/CO document. System Response The Financial Accounting program cannot process the document. Procedure A system error has probably occurred in the application you called up. Check the data transferred to item "0000001001" of the FI/CO document. Assuming that one of the key combination is Account Assignment Group, you will have to check whether have the Account Assignment Group been input in the Customer Master (Billing tabstrips - Accounting sections - Field name: Acct assgmt group). The Account Assignment Group will be copied automatically into the sales order. Check whether the configuration in transaction VKOA have been done correctly. Check whether the sales order (VA03 - Goto - Header - Financial Accounting - Field name: AcctAssgGr) have been filled in automatically. Check whether the billing document (VF03 - Goto - Header - Header - Field name: AcctAssgGr) have been filled in automatically. If the customer master have not been maintained and the user have already input the sales order, then the user will have to maintained the Account Assignment Group manually either in the sales order or the billing documents. Take note for One Time Customer, the user have to input the Account Assignment Group manually into the sales order. One Time Customer can be used by many customer, therefore, the system will not be able to determine the Account Assignment Group manually.

Default Start Variant for VF04
There are two types of variant in VF04. One is the selection variant before clicking the Display Billing List Button. You can set the start variant via SE93 using the Change mode. The second variant is the Billing Layout display variant. This is after clicking the Display Billing List Button.

After creating your layout display variant, you can set it by clicking :Settings -> Display Variant -> Administration Select the layout display variant you want and click :Edit -> Define default settings

Condition Exclusion which will be determined in the billing document
The system can exclude conditions so that they are not taken into account during pricing. For example: Material 4711 costs 150 USD. Some customers receive a discount of 10 USD per 100 pieces. However, a specific customer can buy the material for 100 USD. Since this is a particularly good price, the customer should not also have a discount of 10 USD per 100 pieces. Therefore, this discount is to be excluded from pricing. To create a condition exclusion procedure which will be determined in the billing document. Assign the procedure to the pricing schema, and maintain copy control so that pricing is not copied from Sales Order. To achieve this, copy the standard pricing to a ZXXXX Pricing. Define new document pricing procedure in SM30 - V_TVKV for billing. Assign new document pricing procedures to billing types in SM30 - V_TVFK_PR Define the Condition Exclusion Groups in OV31. Assign the Condition type for the Condition Exclusion Groups in OV32. Assign the Billing Pricing Procedure in VOK8 for the Condition Exclusion Groups. When billing document is being created just enter manually your new price and the pricing program logic will include only the higher price one, excluding the rest that are lower price.

Steps for creating a new or changing an existing Billing Document Types
Create/Change your Billing types configuration in VOFA. Some of the IMG stuff are :-

1) To block automatic transfer of the billing document to accounting, mark the field. Indicates whether the system blocks automatic transfer of the billing document to accounting. During document processing, you can manually transfer blocked billing documents to accounting by selecting: Billing -> Change -> Release accounting 2) Account determination procedure 3) Output determination procedure etc. ... After customizing, use transaction VCHECKVOFA to check your configuration :1) Proforma billing types: If it is a proforma billing type, (VBTYP = U), the field must be blank and the account determination procedure must be empty. 2) Cancellation billing document types: : A check is made to see if the cancellation billing document type has the right VBTYP. An F2 invoice, for example, (VBTYP 'M') can only be canceled with billing type S1 with VBTYP 'N' . A billing type with VBTYP '5' can only be canceled with the VBTYP '6' and vice versa. 3) Cancellation billing document type partner functions A check is made to see if the cancellation billing document type partner functions are empty or if those that correspond to the billing type used are empty. Next, make sure that you maintain the copy control for the Billing Types: Sales documents in VTFA Target e.g. F1 - Invoice F1 - Invoice Source OR - Standard Sales Order ZOR - Your Sales Order

Billing documents in VTFF e.g. G2 - Debit Memo F1 - Invoice G2 - Debit Memo F2 - Invoice Deliveries in VTFL e.g. F1 - Invoice LF - Delivery F1 - Invoice ZOR - Your Delivery Usually for copy control, you let the rest of the settings remains as SAP defaults. You only assign the new Billing Document Types. After that use transaction VCHECKTVCPF to check your Copy control customizing

Billing Block will not worked if you did not assign it
Define the possible block indicators in SM30 - V_TVFS and allocate them to the billing types concerned in SM30 - V_TVFSP.

Your Billing Block will not worked if you did not assigned it to the desired billing types. You can auto block by :1. sales document type in transaction VOV8, fields Billing Block, or 2. item categories in SM30 - V_TVAP, by filling the fields Billing Block.

Billing Plan for Milestone Billing
Milestone billing means distributing the total amount to be billed over multiple billing dates in the billing plan. As each milestone is successfully reached, the customer is billed either a percentage of the entire project cost or simply a pre-defined amount. During sales order processing, the system determines from the item category whether a billing plan is required and, if so, which type of plan The type of billing plan that is determined at this point is set up in Customizing and cannot be changed in the sales document. Billing plans for periodic billing and milestone billing plans for project-related milestone billing have different overview screens so that you can enter data relevant to your processing. For example, for milestone billing, you must be able to enter data to identify the individual milestones. IMG configuration requires :1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Maintain billing plan types for milestone billing in OVBO. Define date description in SM30 - V_TVTB. Maintain Date Category for Billing Plan Type IN OVBJ. Allocate date category in SM30 - V_TFPLA_TY. Maintain date proposal for Billing Plan Type in OVBM. Assign Billing Plan Type to Sales Documents Type in OVBP. Assign Billing Plan Type to Item Categories in OVBR. Define rules for determining the date in OVBS.

Item -> Schedule lines. To display the project-related data for a schedule line.000 30. Mark the schedule line and select Procurement details..Milestone billing is typically used for billing projects. Delivery-relevant order items for which a milestone billing plan applies are billed on the basis of the requested delivery quantity and not on the total of the confirmed quantities. In the SAP R/3 System. such as plant engineering and construction projects.000 Billing Plan Billing date Description Billing Status 01-10-94 Contract 01-03-95 Assembly 01-04-95 Maintenance 01-05-95 Acceptance 01-06-95 Final invoice Network/Activities Milestone Estimate Actual % 10 30 30 30 . Value 10. Each schedule item can be assigned to a network in a project. 2.000 . milestones are defined in a network along with planned and actual dates for the completion of work. The milestones are also assigned to the billing dates in the billing plan. select 1. Such projects often include a series of milestones that mark the completion of different stages of the work. proceed as follows: In one of the overview screens of the sales document. The following figure shows an example of milestone billing where only the Contract have been billed : Order Item Turbine 100.000 30..000 30. Billing Block x x x x Milestone x x x x x . Each milestone-related billing date is blocked for processing until the Project System confirms that the milestone is completed. The connection between the project and the sales document item is made in the individual schedule lines of the item.

Assembly Maintenance Acceptance 01-03-95 01-04-95 01-05-95 01-03-95 For each billing date in a milestone billing plan. such as the start and end dates. always updated with the actual date of the milestone 3. if the date is earlier than the planned billing date for the date Explain what is Billing Plan. This general date information is copied either from contract header data or from proposals in the billing plan type. updated with the actual date of the milestone. you can specify a percentage to be billed or an actual amount. This block remains in effect until the project system reports back that the milestone . the system automatically sets a billing block for each billing date. In milestone billing. you control how the system automatically creates the schedule of dates in a billing plan. Pricing Sales document items are billed as each billing date in the plan becomes due. Billing block A billing block can be set for each date in a billing plan. The block prevents processing for a particular billing date but does not necessarily affect any of the other dates in the plan. you can specify whether the billing date is: 1. The system determines the schedule of individual dates based on general date information. fixed 2. In milestone billing. Billing plan processing includes the following functions:  Automatic creation of billing plan dates  Pricing  Billing block  Billing index  Billing status  Billing rule for milestone billing  Fixed dates in milestone billing  Document flow  Creating with reference  Exchange rate determination  Automatic Creation of Billing Plan Dates In Customizing for Sales. for example. The system determines the amount to be billed either from the condition records that are applicable to the item or from the values that are explicitly entered in the billing plan for a particular billing date.

Exchange rate determination . The price differences can be taken into account during final settlement. the system copies this information into the index. if necessary. the system automatically proposes the reference plan and. During sales order processing for items that require billing plans. After billing has been carried out successfully. Document flow After a particular date in a billing plan is processed for billing. you can specify whether the billing amount is a percentage of the total amount or whether it is a fixed amount.in the corresponding network has been successfully completed. The rule determines how the billing amount for the particular date is calculated. Final settlement is not automatically proposed in the billing plan by the system. For example. the billing status is automatically set to ‘C’. At this point the system removes the block. re-determines the billing dates (based on the current date rules) for inclusion in the new billing plan. Billing status The system assigns a billing status to each billing date in the plan. Billing Rule for Milestone Billing For every date in the milestone billing plan. In addition. Billing index For every billing date in a plan. the system creates and updates a billing index. The document flow for the sales document displays the following data:  Creation date  Billing date  Billed value Creating with reference When you define a billing plan type in Customizing for Sales. whether the date is fixed or whether the system copies the date from the planned or actual milestone dates in a project. you can enter the number of an existing billing plan to serve as a reference during subsequent billing plan creation. you can specify that the amount to be billed is a final settlement that takes into account billing that has not yet been processed. Fixed dates in milestone billing You can control for each date in a billing plan. The status indicates to what extent the billing has been processed for that particular date. price changes may take place after billing dates in the plan have already been processed. the system updates the document flow for the corresponding sales document item. This prevents a billed date from being billed again. For example. you must enter it manually during processing. If a billing date is blocked for billing. you can specify a billing rule.

With the help of your ABAP guy create a copy of that routine under a different number and add your lines of code. the date of the billing document (e. In that field you will see the currently used routine.Combine Billing for deliveries with different date When using transaction VF04 or Billing (background). default data.Invoice split in fields from the sales order Billing Spilt by Item Category Is it possible to split invoice Item category wise. then the system uses the rate specified for the date during billing. When using a header billing plan. Create a modification of copy control routine for billing and use VBAP-PSTYV as an additional split criteria there. the current date) must be entered (In VF04 : settings. you can store a certain exchange rate for each date. SAP Billing . I mean If in sales order there is TAN and TANN then the invoice should split. . then the system uses the exchange rate used for invoice creation and it is forwarded to FI. An exchange rate can also be stored at item level for the sales document (field: Exchange rate for FI on the Billing tab page.In the billing plan with partial billing. Can you please tell me the exact steps what should I add under that(additional split criteria). The amount billed is the amount determined after using this exchange rate to convert from the local currency into the document currency. it is possible.is it possible? Naina Yes. Naina In trx VTFA (if your billing is sales order based) choose your billing type and SO type. If no exchange rate is entered for the the date or at item level. This OSS notes is very helpful :11162 . If. for example. there select your item categories and there select the field VBRK/VBRP data. If an exchange rate is entered both for the date in the billing plan and at item level in the exchange rate field. Let's say you use routine 001.g. this is automatically copied to the corresponding dates for the item billing plans.) In VF06 or background: variant with parametrization) to avoid an unwanted split due to the billing date. all billing plans linked to this header billing plan are automatically updated.Invoice split criteria in billing document 36832 . This fixed rate is valid for all dates in the item billing plan for which no rate is specified in the billing plan. you enter an exchange rate manually for the first date in the header billing plan. Martishev Sabir Thank you for your reply.

<... F5 727 .. PSTYV LIKE VBAP-PSTYV. VTWEG LIKE VBAK-VTWEG.. ZUK-VTWEG = VBAK-VTWEG. VBRK-ZUKRI = ZUK... <.New line END OF ZUK...... This is how it should look after modification: * Header data * VBRK-xxxxx = .. After this routine is created and activated place it as the default copy control routine instead of the old ones. ZUK-PSTYV = VBAP-PSTYV. SPART LIKE VBAK-SPART........ MODUL(3) VALUE '001'.. VTWEG LIKE VBAK-VTWEG.. Maximum number of items in FI reached Message no..... ZUK-VTWEG = VBAK-VTWEG. * Item data * VBRP-xxxxx = ... ENDFORM.New line VBRK-ZUKRI = ZUK...... * Header data * VBRK-xxxxx = . * Item data * VBRP-xxxxx = . ZUK-SPART = VBAK-SPART...... * Additional split criteria DATA: BEGIN OF ZUK. END OF ZUK.. * Additional split criteria DATA: BEGIN OF ZUK. SPART LIKE VBAK-SPART. ZUK-SPART = VBAK-SPART..... MODUL(3) VALUE '001'.. ENDFORM..FORM DATEN_KOPIEREN_001.

Procedure If the documents with an excessive number of items come from another application area (e.Once we receive the payment.If you hit the above erros when you create an invoice in SD. sales.g. we release the sales order for delivery .If customer is set as "prepaid". which implies the processing is "material" specific not "customer" specific.Once we have received his payment.We receive the sales orders and produce a Pro Forma invoice from it. Prepaid process possible -----Original Message----Subject: Prepaid process possible I am looking for information on how we could implement a prepaid process. I found information in online documentation about "down payments" (I imagine that our prepaid process could be a 100% required down payment) but it does not seem that it would work. you can configure the system to the effect that these documents are summarized in FI. we produce an invoice for him to pay . System response FI documents have a 3-digit item counter that limits the number of items permitted per document.We post the payment we received earlier against this last invoice. 1 with 950 items and the other with the rest. . F5 727 Diagnosis The maximum number of items for an FI document ('999') has been exceeded. What we do now: . By "prepaid process" I mean: .We have defined a risk category "prepaid" which is assigned to our prepaid customer.Customer sends to us his order . The error is as follows: Maximum number of items in FI reached Message no. the only way was to break the accounting invoices. From what I understood it looks like the billing plan is handled based upon the item category. " How could this error be solved as none of your invoices are getting accounted in FI? To overcome this. order accounting). .no further billing document is produced. we release the sales order for delivery and produce the invoices. This risk category automatically block the sales order for delivery. logistics. and send it to customer . the corresponding accounting document is not created. .

DC 10 could be the normal process and DC 20 the prepaid process. 5. anybody have any hints? -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Prepaid process possible Hi again! You are right! However. If not check the completion rule in the new item category. It is also possible to code a user exit so that only certain customers will get the prepaid process.As you see. 4. if you create a new item category for the prepaid scenario. can't access a system right now). Restricting Number Of Items In Billing Doc . Extend your material(s) with views for the new distribution channel and enter the "ZXXX" item category group in the field for sales item category group (I think it is on sales 2 screen but I am not sure. and enter the "prepaid item category group in the sales item category group field in material master. Create a new item category group "ZXXX" or something of your choice with the description "Prepaid" or something like that. Check copy control from sales document to billing document for the new item category. This can be done also with item category groups (can be used to determine what default item category that should appear). Then you need to create the sales views in material master for DC 20 for all materials that should be possible to run in the prepaid scenario. Also delivery copy control could be good to check. 3. Here is a proposal of customizing activities to achieve this: 1. (Change the billing in the item category to order related billing with no billing plan) 2. Create a new item category as a copy of the normal item category used for non-prepaid sales. you can select what item category (and process) to use at order entry. This would mean that you either have different materialnumbers for the different processes or use different distribution channels in the sales order. this requires a lot of manual work and a lot of time is wasted to match all documents together. Now you should be able to create a sales order with the new distribution channel where the new item category is defaulted. sales org etc) 6. Create a new distribution channel and assign it to the company structure (plant. and item category group defaulting the new item category. add or check entries so that you have the order type used. There most be a more efficient way to handle this. Check that the sales order is completed when both billing and goods issue for the delivery is posted. In item category assignment.

You can restrict delivery with delivery tolerance. or Go to SPRO>>>IMG>>>Sales & Distribution>>>Billing>>>Billing Documents>>>Country-specific features>>>Maintain Maximum No. Update terminations are displayed in transaction SM13. USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE. An implicit 'COMMIT' can really only be triggered online. If an interruption of the process happens after the assignation of this number. Can you please help in finding out the reason? There is no buffer maintained in the number range also. Notice the commit can be implicit or explicit. 2. Incorrect user exit. . e. custom print program) causing a commit. custom formula. it cannot be used again. We missed some numbers in order. At present. You must also go to copying control for order/delivery to billing document at item level under "Data VBRK/VBRP" and maintain routine 006 "individual invoice limited" or a similar routine that accesses the data maintained here. we faced a peculiar problem that the numbers are missing. But our client want to restrict number items to 8 (max) in an invoice. in Program RV60AFZZ. While creating billing documents. maintaining data here is not enough alone to bring about a billing split by number of billing items. After a possible update termination. Of Billing Items. However. thereby causing invoicing of the desired. Please refer to note 62077 for details. This is where you can define a maximum number of items allowed for all billing documents within a given sales organization. then this error can occur. the number has run in the range and cannot be recovered.the number is set in to the invoice at the beginning of the program. 3. there is no possible solution. Update terminations in transaction VF01 and VF04.How I can restrict number of items in an invoice? If I enter more than 8 items in a sales order and those items get copied into delivery doc then to billing doc. If there is an FI/CO validation/substitution or any program modification (user exit. The billing document number is reserved prior to the update.g. Answer: There are a number of reasons why gaps in invoice numbers may occur: 1. . Update terminate/short dump occurs while billing document update. Number range object is buffered.

do not print immediately (do not use print at time '4'). You have the following options to improve the situation: .The call of a synchronous RFC (Remote Function Call) .The sending of a dialog message (E. release the invoice to accounting This can be get by setting the flag Posting block = [x] in transaction VOFA.) for eventual statement causing commit. This is also recommended from performance point of view.The sending of a SAP screen. Next. This could ensure that no accounting documents can ever be posted for non-existing invoices.Implicit commits on the database are always triggered if the work process would have to wait. I. And after that go and check in the particular Sales order document type whether billing document types are maintained in the sales document or not. Check if Item Category is checked for Billing or not. create the invoice 2.possibly indirectly by a screen changes after a call by CALL TRANSACTION <t_code> or SUBMIT <program>.CALL screens (POPUP) . . . We may get more information on error. So how I can solve this issue. substitution etc. W message).CALL of the 'COMMIT CALL' function module . check have you completed the PGI for the delivery document or not.check in customer coding (user exit. Document Not Relevant For Billing How to resolve "Document not relevant for billing" error message? Check the detailed error log in VF01 screen. This includes the following: . if they are maintained item category is available or not. go VTFA If it Delivery related. go VTFL and check in your document type combination is maintained or not. go to that Item Category functionality VOV7 and find if it is order or delivery related billing. . this is also recommended for performance improvement. . Normal Sales Order Cycle:- . Then. If every thing is correct go and find with copy controls If it order related.Call of a function module or termination of a function module in another work process . validation. After delivery while creating billing document system showing error that no billing document is generated for material no 395.use a two-step process to post the invoice to accounting: 1.

always copy as with reference to similar sales order. Sales Document Type:The sales document types represent the different business transactions. copy as from standard & maintain New. Define Number Ranges For Sales Documents: Maintain number range with discussion with core team. copy as from standard & maintain New. etc. Combine sales organizations / Combine distribution channels / Combine divisions: Ensure to maintain these. Maintain Copying Control For Billing Documents: Maintain relevant copy controls such as Sales Order to Billing. Assign Item Categories: If possible. 3. This will minimize selection of Sales Order Type as per sales area. Define Schedule Line Categories: If possible use Standard Schedule Lines. To create new sales order type. Define Item Categories: If possible use Standard Item Category. copy as from standard & maintain New. such as Inquiry. Define Number Ranges for Deliveries: Ensure to maintain number range. Define Billing Types: If possible use Standard Billing Type. *3. 2. *2. Incase if required to create new. Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types: A. 2. If possible use standard sales order. copy as from standard & maintain New. Note: Ensure that Copy Control settings are done Sales Order to Sales Order (QT --> OR): VTAA Sales Order to Delivery (OR --> LF): VTLA Sales Order to Billing (OR --> F1): VTFA Delivery to Billing(LF --> F2): VTFL Billing to Sales Order (F2 --> RE): VTAF . copy as from standard & maintain New. Define Number Range For Billing Documents: Ensure to maintain number range. etc. Incase if required to create new. Define Item Categories for Deliveries: If possible use Standard Item Categories for Delivery Type. Incase if required to create new. use standard. Step 3: IMG > Sales and Distribution > Billing > 1. Define Delivery Types: If possible use Standard Delivery Type. Deliver to Billing. 3. *2. Incase if required to create new. Incase if required to create new. Formula for deriving item category: Sales Document Type + Item Category Group + Usage + Higher Level Item Category = Item Category Schedule Line: 1. Assign Schedule Line Categories: If possible. else Sales Order creation will give error. use standard. Formula for deriving Schedule Line: Item Category + MRP Type / No MRP Type. Step 2: IMG > Logistic Execution > Shipping > Deliveries > *1. Sales Document Item: *1.Step 1: Sales Document Type IMG > Sales and Distribution > Sales > Sales Documents > Sales Document Header: 1. B. Sales Order. Assign sales order types permitted for sales areas: Assign only required Sales Order Types to required Sales Area. 2. Quotation.

The configuration differs from scenario to scenario & requirement of the client. Tickets from users: After the following process: Sales Order --> Outbound Delivery (Goods issue) --> Billing, what happens if there is a cancellation? How to perform cancellation for this process: Billing --> Goods receipt --> Sales Order ? (Is this the correct reversal to perform in order for cancellation?) After performing the process Sales Order --> Outbound Delivery (Goods issue) --> Billing, the billing document will be passed on to the FI consultants. But if there is a cancellation then, this billing doc. which will have a accounting document also that will also get cancelled. In the FI customer open line items. Cancellation of billing - VF11 Cancellation of delivery - VL09 Then go to VL02N and remove the picking qty and make it blank then Goto VA02 and cancel the order. You can delete the Sales Order if transaction have been done: In VA02 , just enter into the sales order goto menu path -> Files-> Cancel or delete option will be there will be there. After deletion / cancellation of that sales order that order doesn't exist in the database. For example , if your sales order number is 1055 and you have deleted or cancelled that sales order, then that sales order number doesn't exist in the database and you cant create another sales order with the same order number 1055. When you create another sales order the number will skip to the next one i.e, 1056. You can only reject the Sales order if there are existing transations: 1. First you need to cancel the billing document using T-code VF11, so it will reverse all the updated accounting entries. 2. Now you need to cancel the Post goods Issue using VL09, once it is reversed, the delete the delivery using VL02N. 3. Once the delivery is deleted, the sales order will be open. Now put a reason for rejection in the line item/s, and reject the order, the order will get closed. It is not advicable delete a sales order. Match Billing Cancel Document How to find out the link between the original and cancelled billing documents? Goto to tcode SE16 Table: VBRK Field: VBRK-ZUONR - Assignment (this field link the original and cancelled billing documents) Cancel billing documents must be successfuly released to accounting. Usually it failed when user tried to cancelled current period with previous date How to schedule billing to be run automatically?

You can create individual Billing documents in VF04, with out any saving of each and every billing document. Select all the deliveries which you want to create billing documents, using Cntr Button, and click on individual billing. Then all the deliveries will go for billing individually in a single run. And you can also see all the billing documents numbers, which are created. No need to select single delivery each time. If you want to do a batch job for billing, proceed for the following process 1. goto VF04, in the selection screen Delivery document range, for which you want to create billing documents e.g., in SD Document field, give delivery 1 to 10. 2.Now Click on GOTO -> Variant -> Save as Variant, then it will take you to another screen, give the variant name, e.g., test, and save it. 3. goto SM36, this is used to do batch job, if you dont know any thing also, you can do the entire process, using JOB WIZARD, click on Job Wizard which is on the screen. 4. It will take you to different steps, just you need to give your variant name, (in job name field) (in the first screen) the continue for further steps, In the ABAP Progamme Name give SDBILLDL, (this is the programme used to create billing documents) continue to give the specified time which you want to run this batch job, like immediate, after an hour, or a specific day like so. 5. Continue further to complete the task, now you batch job will run at a specified time which you mentioned, if you mentioned as immediately, then once you comple this process, your vairant will run, and billing documents will be created. 6. Plese ensure that all the deliveries are perfect, meaning there is no billing block or any thing. You can check the status of your batch job using t. code SM37. Difference between the RSNAST00 and SDBILLDL program. RSNAST00 is a program which is related to output related activities. Using this program, we can schedule the creation of outputs (PDFs, email etc) in total for any document created in any of the applications. The details are read and stored in the database table NAST. The same program is customised for each applications using programs like SD70AV1A which are also used for the same purpose but only for sales orders. SDBILLDL is the program for Billing due list. This program finds out all the orders or deliveries or both which are due for billing and it will trigger the billing creation. It reads tables like VBAK, VBAP, VBUK, VBUP, LIKP, LIPS etc and the created billing documents are stored in tables VBRK, VBRP. Please explain to me the concept of resource related billing and its different between periodic and milestone. In what kind of business scenario do we use it? and what are the settings required to use it? Periodic billing is used when you want to bill the customer at different points of time based on the periodicity or progress of the work.

Milestone billing can be used for this type of billing purposes when you want to have billing control from the project. Resource billing is based on the resource consumption for the particular activities. Dynamic Item Processor (DIP) profile is used for the resource related billing. Steps to be followed: 1) Configure DIP Profile (T.code ODP1) 2) Specify the usage (i) Billing & Result Analysis (RRB) (ii) Request Quotation (Sales Pricing) 3) Specify (i) Sales Document Type (PS2) (ii) SD Doc Type CMR 4) In Sales Order Type --> Sales Order Category - "L" (Debit Memo Request) 5) Document Pricing Procedure --> PS (Customer Project) 6) Select the billing usage and click on characteristics. eg--> Activity Type 7) Then define sources. Select "Actual Cost" as we use actual cost for RRB. Define% 8) Sources --> Selection Criteria: This would display all characteristics. Now in Activity Type --> Mention the activity type 9) If more activity type are being used then create set of activity type using T.code GS01 10) Material Determination --> Initially create material with "Material Type = Service" 11) The service material should be mentioned in the material determination 12) Criteria -- In criteria allocate the activity type for the specific material. (We can also use cost element, cost center, which we have defined in characteristics) 13) Create Project (T.code CJ20N) 14) Create Sales Order (T.code VA01) 15) Book CATS 16) Execute DP91 to view Sales Pricing Common Errors: AD01-155: Error during material determination for sales document item. Material Origin field was not checked in the Costing tab of the material master. IX-057: No cost management is provided for sales document (contract) item. This is usually because there is no requirements type assigned to the contract item (see procurement tab). No material appears in DMR/CMR. In the material master costing view, set the "Material Origin" checkbox (see OSS note 174382) No expenditure item found. Go back to the service order and check there are actual costs

Check your DIP Profile; specifically the sources section to ensure you are not filtering out any dynamic items. CO Configuration: KL03: Check activity type validity dates KA03: Check cost element validity dates KA03: For labour, check cost element category is 43 KA03: Check if Record qty flag is set on Indicators tab KA03: Check cost element assigned to your controlling area KP26: Check that activity type is linked to cost centre KP26: Check that there is a rate for the activity type/cost centre KP26: Check are you using the correct version Real SD Support Question: I have cancelled a billing document through vf11. That means the cancellation billing document did not generate accounting document. Where to checked? When you cancel a billing document, you are actually creating a cancellation document. The cancellation document copies data from the billing document and transfers an offsetting entry to the accounting department. So once you cancel the billing document it will create one cancellation Document and one reversal Accounting Document. There is no need to cancel Accounting document which is created after cancel a billing document. Lets handle it phase by phase. First Scenario Your accounting document not generated, 1. VF02 Mode Click “Release to Accounting" the Accounting documents not generated. 2. If yes, then OK Else 3. Check Whether you have assigned Accounting keys to the relevant condition types. 4. Check Account assignment Procedure VKOA and check G/L account has been assigned. 5. If error found correct it Else 6. Check with FI Consultant whether Accounting entries has been posted with reference to customer and Invoice. Second Scenario If accounting documents gets generated and you use VF11 to Cancel the invoice, then automatically the posting document gets reversed and separate number will be assigned for those documents. This you can see in the document flow. Check with FI Consultant. Please Check this :

Let me explain using a very simple example: You sell 10 units of a material A for $100 per unit . Customer may send a self-bill for the above case like $80 a piece. Then check Posting Block. 2099 RETRO-BILLING Now due to price negotiations price may change to $90 w.Amount $1000 Invoice is sent to customer for $1000 on say Sep 20. You will execute retro-billing process. 2099.e. 2099. If it has not generated the accounting document then check the settings in OBA7 Are retro billing and Self-billing referring to the same process? Answer: Retro billing and Self-billing are entirely different processes and can be executed independently. These documents will get attached to the original invoice Important to Note . Thus you will update your price conditions in VK12 for this material/customer to $90 with validity from Sep 01. Check whether for the S1 billing document type Posting block has been checked or not. Finally check whether the billing document which you were cancelling that billing document generated accounting document or not.you must maintain the 'use of order reason for retro-billing' in Order reasons configuration for this to work properly.f Sep 01. . But as you have already invoiced the customer in past so to take care of the extra billing . system will provide you the list of candidate invoices to which this price reduction is applicable and hence you can simulate or even execute retro-billing after providing Cr/Dr memo type and order reason. You will go to VFRB and enter the selection criteria for the material and suitable dates. This will hit the supplier system in form of EDI/Fax/Paper etc and on verification in system will show in Self-bill Monitor VSB1n. If it has been checked then uncheck it and secondly also check in the F2 billing document type whether S1 cancellation billing document type has been assigned or not. it should be unchecked.SPRO--->Sales and Distribution-->Billing Documents-->Define Billing Types Select Billing type S1. Supplier does not send the invoice to customer. SELF-BILLING Here customer raises invoices for itself.

For FI postings If there is a manual entry in the sales order field VBKD-KURRF (Goto -> Header -> Accounting).currency <-> Loc.currency. I am facing the problem with the exchange rate. KOMV-KKURS Exchange Rate for the conversion Cond. which will post to accounting. then it is copied into VBRK-KURRF. Otherwise VBRK-KURRF is determined during invoice creation. As the rates picked in the sales order as default exchange rates maintained for the day. if you want that same exchange rate to be in Accounting document in Sales Order GOTO -> HEADER -> ACCOUNTING there one field is there 'Exch. Solution: You can have the same exchange rate (OB08) in sales order to be in billing document: In Copy control VTFL at item category level -> PricingExchRate type to 'A'Copy from sales order Now.currency .rate-acct. See the OSS note 36070. Is there is any provision in sap system so that I can change the exchange rate in the billing document and with this same exchange rate I can post the entries in accounting also. please review: VBRP-KURSK Exchange Rate for the conversion Loc. It will solve the problem as it will give me the billing amount in exact LC amount also. for Price Determination The determination of this exchange rate depends on the setting of TVCPFLP-PFKUR in customizing copy-control VBRK-KURRF Exchange Rate for the conversion Loc. and make a large difference of amount at this instance. It is supposed that manual entry has higher priority. system will generate a credit memo of $200 for the customer and a debit memo for same amount with reference ?_?_?. The billing document will be posted to the accounting after getting the money from the customer and the exchange rate will become something else at this moment also.currency. Now the customer while paying will pay $800 as per its self-bill and the same would be settled against original invoice of $1000 and SB credit Memo of $200. In SAP billing process.On processing. and I can’t change it at that instance also. if the sales order is MTO and goods will dispatched after 2 months and within these 2 month the exchange rate got floated by a large amount and during the billing with VF01 t-code. Other debit memo of $200 (with ?_?_? reference) will remain open in system which may be cleared off by a retro billing run where supplier may reduce the price by $20 or take further action as needed. In the billing document there are 3 exchange rates.currency <-> Doc. the exchange rate will be something else.currency <-> Doc.' enter the exchange rate there manually.

The exchange rate should be based on your configuration in copy control (VTFA or VTFL) at the item category level. then it is copied in the subsequent billing document. Proforma invoice is exactly the same as to Invoice. 97487. See the OSS notes 92613. Goods issue is not require to create Proforma invoice.invoice is not generated.billing is not proposed.At price condition level. It is always determined according to the Pricing date. Requirement for Proforma invoice may differs from business perspective. No statistical data is created on the basis of Proforma invoice. So he demands proforma invoice. In VOV8 .(delivery free of charge. Hence system does not generate invoice. . In Sample order/delivery account receivable does not increase but cost of sample order is added to sales promotion account or client suggested accounts. F8 is delivery related proforma invoice and you can create proforma invoice for same delivery you as many as you like. During VF01 the system determines the Exchange rate for FI posting VBRK-KURRF from the currency tables according(OB08) to the billing date only if the field Exchange rate for FI posting is empty in the source sales document (VBKDKURRF). The difference is Proforma invoice is need not to be paid and system does not transfer data to FI(Financial accounting). .order type FD) . The choices you have are as follows: Pricing Exchange Rate Type (V_TVCPFLP-PFKUR) A Copy from sales order B Price exchange rate = Accounting rate C Exchange rate determination according to billing date D Exchange rate determination according to pricing date E Exchange rate determination according to current date Difference Between Pro-Forma And Billing Doc Conceptually and real life scenario . This is the standard working of the system. manually or copied from a reference invoice (by copy control routine). In summary: Proforma invoice will not create the accounting entries.Proforma invoice is used to declare cost of goods to custom department to estimate duties/levies or to collect advance payment from the buyer. In case of sample orders . If the sales document has this field filled. While making the payment.One requirement is to intimate the customer to settle an advance payment. customer wants to see the sample bill for which he is going to make payment.

It’s a copy that's all to show to during Custom when goods are in transit he has to carry this proforma document. your credit policy requires decentralized credit management. . One credit control area contains credit control information for each customer. Both are same in SD point of view: . you can define credit control areas for each company code or each group of company codes. For example.Another requirement is to have a document while freight forwarders carry the materials. If. if your credit management is centralized. Billing document will have their values triggers to accounts thru RAD resulting in an accounting document. Credit Management How To Do Configuration For Credit Management Credit and risk management takes place in the credit control area. you can implement credit management that is centralized. or somewhere in between. so an accounting document will not get generated and it is mostly useful for Stock transfers from manufacturing plant to any depot whether locally or abroad.In FI terminology we call as INVOICE. Difference between Billing and invoice. An invoice or Proforma invoice should be accompanied.In MM again only INVOICE will be there for Vendors.Another requirement to have proforma while Stock Transport Order. Proforma invoice will not triggers data to an accounts. An organizational unit that represents the area where customer credit is awarded and monitored. decentralized. on the other hand. you can define one credit control area for all of your company codes. According to your corporate requirements.. Credit limits and credit exposure are managed at both credit control area and customer level. The implementation guide is under Enterprise Structure -> Definition or Assignment -> Financial Accounting and then Maintain credit . . This is the legal requirement. You set up credit control areas and other data related to credit management in Customizing for Financial Accounting. if credit control is performed across several company codes.In SD terminology we call as Billing Document and . This organizational unit can either be a single or several company codes.

Transaction OB01 Credit management/Change risk category . Settings for the credit checks 7. You assign customers to specific credit control areas and specify the appropriate credit limits in the customer master record. 1. Company code: Credit control area: 2. Transaction OB38 Check which credit control area is assigned to the company code. Transaction OVAD Which settings do exist for the delivery type used? Delivery type: Credit group for delivery: Credit group for goods issue: 9. The credit control area found is stored in field VBAK-KKBER. Transaction OVFL Check which credit control area is assigned to the sales area. or the credit control area must be entered under the relevant company code in table T001CM of the credit control areas allowed. field "All company codes" must be marked in Transaction OB45. Transaction OVAK Which settings do exist for the sales document type used? Sales document: Check credit: Credit group: 8.control area.4. Payer: Credit control area: 4. Transaction OBZK For the settings under items 2 . Sales area: Credit control area: 3. Company code: Credit control areas allowed: 6. Tips by : Kapilaa Settings for determining the credit control area of a document. Transaction SE37 Is user exit EXIT_SAPV45K_001 being used? 5. The settings of items 1 . Transaction XD02 or VD02 Check which credit control area is assigned to the payer.4 are taken into account according to their priority.

the individual credit checks for key fields o credit control area o risk category o credit group are set. The credit price is stored in field VBAP-CMPRE and used for update and credit check. Take these key fields from the above settings and go to the detail screen. check whether fields "Reaction" and "Status/block" are set correctly. 13. the credit check status must be set (field "Status/block"). Settings for updating the credit values Update of the credit values is required for the limit check (static or dynamic credit limit check). Transaction OVA7 Update of the credit value is active for the corresponding item type if the check box is marked. You can find the used pricing procedure of the order under "Item -> Condition -> Analysis".Definition of the risk category for each credit control area. To carry out follow-up actions in case of a credit block. This field corresponds to field "Active receivable" in Transaction VOV7. Usually. Pricing In the pricing procedure used for pricing. If you use another update group. This risk category can be assigned to a credit account by using Transaction FD32. . Transaction OVA8 Here. Transaction OB45 Which update group (field "Update") do you use in the relevant credit control area? The default setting is "12". Item type: Active receivable: 14. the net value plus taxes is used. 11. subtotal "A" must be entered in a line for determining the credit value (mark the pricing procedure and doubleclick on "Control"). Pricing procedure: Line with subtotal = 'A': 15. This way the system is determined to use this subtotal for credit pricing. check whether this is fine with you. 10. If you open an OSS message. Transaction FD32 Credit master data for the payer of the relevant document. Transaction V/08. Credit account: Credit limit: Risk category: Currency: 12. please tell us the alternative update group. In particular.

DATA: W_CMGST LIKE VBUK-CMGST. Try using routine 103. SELECT SINGLE * INTO W_ZSDCRD FROM ZSD_CREDITBLCK WHERE KKBER = VBAK-KKBER AND CTLPC = VBAK-CTLPC.Availablity. For example. Transaction OMO1 Which kind of update did you choose for structure S066? In any case. you can write a routine 903 because you only wanted this reaction for certain business units. IF SY-SUBRC = 0 AND VBUK-CMGST CA 'B'. MESSAGE I706(Z1). ENDIF. Irregardless. *} REPLACE *{ INSERT DEVK966908 1 *} INSERT * Read the subsequent function information for the message PERFORM FOFUN_TEXT_READ USING GL_FOFUN CHANGING FOFUN_TEXT. "Synchronous update (1)" has to be chosen as the kind of update. using a routine similar to this will prevent the requirement from appearing in MD04 for orders blocked on credit. All other settings will lead to errors. Code: DATA: W_ZSDCRD TYPE ZSD_CREDITBLCK. You should try and use one of the standard requirements.Credit control area: Update: 16. EXPORT VBUK-CMGST TO MEMORY ID 'CREDIT'. MRP block for Credit limit attained Customers How to block the requirement (MD04) generated by the item category in a sales order when the customer has attained the credit limit? The MRP requirements still appear even though the schedule is zero. IMPORT VBUK-CMGST TO W_CMGST FROM MEMORY ID 'CREDIT'. See in transaction "VOFM". you may have to tweak if it doesn't work exactly as you'd like. MESSAGE ID 'V1' TYPE 'E' NUMBER '849' WITH FOFUN_TEXT RAISING ERROR. *{ INSERT DEVK966908 2 . IF W_CMGST = SPACE. Under Requirements / Subsequent Functions / Reqs.

after creating the delivery . we are going for credit management but facing one problem. This can be set up in customizing under risk management-> credit management. Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing -----Original Message----Subject: Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing we are on 4. Rich Dragani -----Reply Message----Subject: Re: LOG: Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking From: Swami Subramanyan Program RVKRED08? Or manually execute function module SD_ORDER_CREDIT_RECHECK. eg. also the item is mark for credit update. the bill value is appearing in 'receivables' but the amount in 'sales value' is not getting reduced. in fd32customer credit management change . because of this the credit exposure is increasing continuously. .the sales value feild in not getting updated after creating the billing.that value remains same in the feild of sales value. update group for corrosponding credit ctrl area is 12.*} INSERT ENDIF.6b. Regards Swami -----Reply Message----Subject: Re: Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking From: Leslie Paolucci We check credit at the time of the delivery (at delivery creation and before picking) and use the blocked sales doc process/list to release them. when i create the order .the order value get updated in the sales value in fd32. ENDFORM. Does anyone know how I can automatically re-execute a dynamic credit check a few days prior to shipment for future dated sales orders. but when i am going for billing (delivery related). Any ideas would be appreciated. Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking -----Original Message----Subject: Credit Mgmt Dynamic checking From: Richard Dragani Hi credit experts.

Billed & Transfered to FI.000/Here credit limit exceeds then system reacts.can anyone tell the missing link? thanking in advance -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing Hi. Your customer should be assigned the credit control area. Options : A) Warning Message B) Error Message (Sales Order won't be saved) C) Error Message with Delivery Block AUTOMATIC CREDIT CHECK : Give extra credit facilities to the particular customer.Value : Sales Order Has been saved but not delivered Open Item : Sales Order has been saved . SIMPLE CREDIT CHECK : Tr.Code . Further also refer to the OSS note 18613.000/Suppose Doc. .00. The credit update group controls when the values of open sales orders. Doc.1.1. 2. Difference Between Simple and Automatic Credit Check Types Explain in detail difference between simple and automatic credit check types.10. In automatic check. In your Item Category Credit should be active.FD32 It Considers the Doc. Eg: Customer Credit Limit is Rs.Value + Open Item Value is Rs. Check the credit update group in the transaction OB45. deliveries and billing documents are updated. but not received the payment from the customer. Regards. -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing customer is assign to concorn CCA and item category is mark for credit active -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Sales value field in not getting updated after creating the billing Hi. difference between static and dynamic checks. You need to check couple of settings like: 1. It should be '000012'.Value + Open Items. Delivered.

STATIC CREDIT LIMIT DETERMINATION :Checking Group + Risk Catageory + Credit Control Area. there will be no further supply to the customer. you have not managed Credit Checks as well. he had comfortably reached to the fullest credit (or even more) which you can afford for any customer. . DYNAMIC CREDIT CHECK : 1) Open Doc 2) Open Delivery 3) Open Billing 4) Open Items 5) Horizon Period = Eg.Value : Which is delivered but not billed 3) Open Billing Doc.3& 4 values for the lost 3 months Then assign the Sales Doc & Del Documents. A) Credit Checking Groups : Types of Checking Groups. there is very bad debt with this customer and need to recover from him and till then.Type(OR) + credit Check(0) + Credit Group (01) Credit Limit Check for Delivery Type : Del. 2) Since this customer is good as you felt. Sales Doc.3Months Here the System will not consider the above 1. 3) One fine day you got realised that. 01) Sales 02) Deliveries 03) Goods Issue At all the above 3 levels orders can be blocked.Value : Which is billed but not posted to FI 4) Open Item : Which is transfered to FI but not received from the customer.2.Value / Sales Order Value : Which is save but not delievered 2) Open Delivery Doc. So. HIGH RISK (0001) : LOW CREDIT LOW RISK (0002) : MORE CREDIT MEDIUM RISK(0003) : Average Credit Static Credit Check it checks all these doc value & check with the credit limit 1) Open Doc. he is doing good business and supplied material on Credit of 45 days.Type (LF) + Del Credit Group (02) + Goods Issue Credit Group (03) Dunning Process In Credit Management Explain about dunning process in credit management? Let me explain in simple terms: 1) You have a Customer which you had felt. B) Risk Catageory : Based on the risk catageories company decide how much credit has to give to the customer.

For each procedure. d) Finally. 2. we will send at least further reminder (dunning notice) may be 9 times (9 reminders) (Dunning level) and what intervels of time (dunning frequency) c) Still if the customer doesnt resopond for the reminders. sometime back. For a customer. Remember Reliance. sending street rowdies for recovering the bad debts from users. like this different ways of reaching a customer. But need not be also. Credit functionality is not there for this customer. What is the differences between Credit Mngmt v/s Dunning? Dunning is one part of credit management. Suppose for a customer there is no credit limit set.Amount limits . if the customer didn't pay the amount even after the period specified in the .. I will give you two examples: 1. you will file a law suit against the customer for recovering the Payments. intimation by call or personally etc. you may proceed for auction of his property or as per the order for Law.Number of dunning levels .Dunning frequency . b) In case customer doesnt respond. you will not forget dunning forever. In this case. fax. the user defines . after getting veridict. the definition of Dunning procedure is a pre-defined procedure specifying how customers or vendors are dunned. you will maintain the Dunning Procedure at customer master.4) Your company's legal department has laid a policy that. Now in SAP. But here in dunning also there are different levels. like: a) We will send a normal payment reminder.Texts for the dunning notices In SAP. the credit functionality is enabled means credit limit etc. inorder to recover any bad debts. That is dunning. Referring to this your SD Team / FI Team (user team) will effect Dunning PS: You might remembered the dunning procedure laid by Relaince Mobile. If the customer didn't pay the amount even after the period specified in the payment terms is over then in that case we are going to generate the dunning letters and send them to the customer either by simple mail. are set for this customer.

If a customer is also a vendor. Surely you must run report RVKRED77 (Note 400311 . 000012 . you can offset the account balances against one another.payment terms is over then in that case we are going to generate the dunning letters and send them to the customer either by simple mail. Sometimes your business partners may fall behind on payments. It then saves the dunning data determined for the items and accounts affected. advance) + Sales value 2. and creates a dunning notice. intimation by call or personally etc.updated at Sales Order 000015 . The SAP System allows you to dun business partners automatically. Check Note 425523 . the exposure increases by SO value. If Update=000012 in CCAr then on creating Sales Order. . The dunning program selects the overdue open items. 1. You can use the dunning program to dun both customers and vendors. Dunning is partly a part of credit management. You can send them a payment reminder or a dunning notice to remind them of their outstanding debts. What do you mean by credit exposure? They are the transactions with a customer that are relevant for credit limits on a specified date.updated at Billing To look at only Receivables for a customer look in FD32. This dunning is used in the credit management to check the credit worthiness of the customer. determines the dunning level of the account in question. How is credit exposure calculated (seen in FD32)? It’s simple summation of Receivables + Special liabilities (like down payments. If you have bad data run the reorganization program through SE38. What do you meant by Dunning? Dunning is the process of sending the remainders to the customer about the payment which is due and crossed the limit.Collection of consulting notes: Credit update and related. The credit exposure is updated based on the update algorithm assigned to the credit control area. So. like this different ways of reaching a customer. fax. It may be necessary to dun a vendor if he or she has a debit balance as a result of a credit memo. The system duns the open items from business partner accounts in which the overdue items create a debit balance.RVKRED77: Reorganization credit data. new documentation and related will help you).updated at Delivery 000018 .

the result of unit costing is issued to the first position on the conditions screen for the item. It’s the credit exposure which should not crossed over the credit limit. how do I do it? I think u need to change the validity of the condition record for the condition type K007 defining it not valid for that particular 2 months. where we can get customer credit exposure which showing in FD32.code F. EK01 : If you use this condition type. What role exposure play in the credit management process. then also on creating Sales Order. Am I missing something. The value can be used as a basis for price determination. Go to t. These are the condition type that will display the results of the unit costing for certain type of sales document. Pricing Difference between Condition Type Please explain the difference between Ek01 ( Actual Cost) and EK02 Calculated Cost. the exposure increases by SO value. the result of unit costing is simply a statistical value which you can compare with the price. 3. I mean does the system match the value of credit exposure with credit limit to find that it is exceeded or it does it differently? Credit exposure is in fact the main player. Is this correct? I think in case of 000015 Open sales order values should not be considered. EK02: If you use this condition type.31 for an overview of the credit exposure. For reporting purpose. In credit management if the customer’s credit limit is 10000 and credit exposure is 9900 then customer can only be able to buy now worth of 100 only. and also you can use s_ALR_8701212218 to overview the credit exposure.But if update=000015. . now I want to exclude k007 for the next 2 orders or so? I have set the exclusion indicator for the condition type.but still the condition is being accepted when I create a sales order. 2) The condition type must agree with the condition type defined for unit costing in the pricing procedure. Please note the following points : 1) The condition type must have condition category 'Q' (costing). I have a customer who is being offered two discounts ie k007 and k005. And also the settings of the Requirements as it is correct that it overrules the exclusion.

You have to implement SAP Note No. Distribution Channel 3. Pricing procedure assigned to customer (defined in customer master) . The defining parameters for pricing procedure determination are: 1.ZWXX) One way to do it is :Mark the condition types you want to group as statistical and remove the account assignment key. Document Procedure (defined in Sales doc\Billing doc maintenance) 5.Accumulate the amount of condition types in accounting document To accumulate the amount of condition types in accounting document without affecting the pricing display in billing document. Create a subtotal in your pricing procedure that will add them together and put in the account assignment key for it. SalesOrg 2. you still cannot exclude certain condition types and subtotal lines from being processed or displayed in the condition screen by restricting the authorizations. As an illustration :ZPXX 3500 ZDXX 1000ZWXX 500(all condition types are shown separately in pricing view) Journal: Dr Vendor 2000 Cr Sales 2000 (ZPXX . Pricing Procedure is determined thru trx OVKK. Hiding Price Condition Types on a Sales Document Up to now you.Authorization check for the condition screen Creating New Pricing Procedure What is the transaction code for creating new pricing procedure and how to attach it to specific plant? You create PP in spro > Sales and Distribution > Basic Functions > Pricing > Pricing Control > Define and Assign Pricing Procedures > Maintain Pricing Procedures You can't attach PP to specific plant. This way the individual components will still display on your pricing screen but FI will only get one posting. Division 4. 105621 .ZDXX .

Put them both together. Then the calculation will be done based on the quantity of the material. you end up with a final value of $100 + (20% of $100) = $120. condition ZZ02 also exists lower in the schema. subtraction or multiplication. you forego the default value and then use the alternative calculation type in calculating the condition value against the particular condition. use an externally calculated 20%. volume and also the minimum amount etc etc. imagine you have a condition type ZZ01. with a condition record maintained (master data) for $100. Similarly SAP also has got a default calculation type in the control data of the condition type.What is "alt cal type" & "alt base value" & "Requirement field" in the Pricing Procedure Can any one explain exactly what is "alt cal type" & "alt base value" and also " Requirement field" in the pricing procedure? The alternate base value is used as the calculation basis only. For ex if you want to calculate the discount of 10 % for a material then you have to have a base value on which this 10% is calculated. This means if you maintain the value of 10 % in the condition record. the final value would be $100 + (10% of $90) = $109. while the alternate calculation is used to modify the final value. For ex if you are calculating the Freight charges for a Material . For example. Now. Now once again. it depends on so many criteria like. and you could end up with $100 + (20% of $90) = $118. Normally you take the condition value of the base price of the material to calculate the value. Alternative Calculation Type: Normally if you want to calculate a value you have to use a calculation type for determinating the value. which was $90. in those cases. Alternative Condition Base value : If you have to calculate any value then you have to have a base value for it.use the original price PR00 only. The standard calculation would result in a final value of $110. Here what happens is suppose if you define Your condition type that calculates the base price of a material on Qty based. This calculation type is either addition. The alternate calculation routine says. but with a rate of 10%. "don't use $100 as the basis -. If the customer orders 10 Nos and you have maintained a unit price of 100 Rs for each material then the value determined is 1000 INR. There you have the options of either Qty based . the weight." Then. The alternate base value could say. you maintain the calculation type as %. In some cases you have to forego the default calculation types and use the customer specific method for calculating a value. "ignore the 10% altogether. Instead. Fixed Amount Based or Percentage based. ." Then. Then this percentage is taken as the calculation type and the condition value is determined. Similarly if the discount condition type .

from a business process perspective it makes absolutely NO sense to reprice a quotation when converting to a sales order. or am I able to find anything on a way of RE-Pricing be done in a QUOTATION? You can always 'Update" pricing manually in a quotation the same way you do in a sales order. this is not only a standard minimum quantity discount. If the customer orders 10 pieces of part ABC. Quantity Based Discounts in Bulk Quantities Sales You're looking to implement quantity based discounts in 4. Re-pricing in a Quotation How can I. it should return $100 again. If you are asking how to reprice a quotation when it converts into a sales order. 30.6c. however you have in house consumption that is allowed to consume only 1 part at a time. 3." The system only uses the table behind this access if the sales order for which the price must be calculated is in a foreign currency. The only values for which $50 should apply are 10. etc. However. 2 pieces. the entire point of using quotations is to firm up details like pricing before creating the sales order. the price is $100. However. For example. . etc. The system only accesses a condition table to determine the price if the requirement specified has been met. and only give the discount for specific quantity intervals.multiples of the bulk quantity 10. 13. etc. if a customer orders 1 piece. 20. You . Menu path Edit --> New Pricing or press the 'Update pricing' button on the item conditions tab. either in create or change modes. 12. the price is $50. IMG: Sales & Dist --> Sales --> --> Maintain Copy Control for Sales Docs --> Sales Doc to Sales Doc (transaction vtaa). that can be done with the copy controls of the Item Category. You are trying to sell items in specific bulk quantities.Now you don't want to take the base value and take other values as base value which are derived on some formulae. You have discussed changing your part number to reflect a bulk qty of 10. of part ABC. The field you need to be concerned with is "Pricing type". Example: The system uses an access sequence to determine the price of a material. Requirement: A factor in the condition technique that restricts access to a condition table. One of the accesses in the sequence contains the requirement "in foreign currency. Just choose the combination of documents and the respective item category. If the customer tries to order 11 pieces. After all. So you create a routine which will do the mathematical operations in the routine and derive you a value which is now used as the base value for calculating the condition value for a particular condition type.

That should do it. It is agreed with that creating a separate material number is not a good idea. In the access sequence. Can you put to item level field in the condition table and access sequence? Structure KOMK refers to header of the sales order. This is the include for structure KOMP. but shipping point of course is on item level. pallet. consume internally and ship externally. Configure you bulk pricing condition type by usual means (it should be a base price rather than discount). Create a new condition base value routine via VOFM where you check XKWERT to see if it is a whole number.e. Assign this new routine to your bulk price condition in your pricing procedure in ALT condition base value column. activate. Maintain UOM conversion between your base UOM and this new UOM 3. 7.g. You created a condition table with the above key fields. You'll have to do some settings to reach your goal. Taking your requirements literally. Define/Select a UOM for selling in bulk (i. and maintained the relevant setting (access sequence. distribution channel and ship-to party together) to determine the sales price. ZZVSTEL with component type VSTEL. but you're just not sure where to start. assign search help H_TVST to the component. you found that the shipping point field's document structure is KOMK. There is an error message in the sales order pricing analysis ("access not made" in the shipping point field). condition type and pricing procedure). . Step 1 Append structure KOMP. Maintain bulk price conditon record in the Bulk UOM.would vastly prefer to keep one part number that you order from the supplier. You are fairly certain there is basic functionality that covers this. If it is not then set XKWERT to zero. box whatever) 2. If you want to make more points. You can try this :1. it is possible. 6. Do this by changing through SE11 the table KOMPAZ. cas. Add a component e. Place this new bulk price behind your normal "PR00" price in the pricing procedure 5. Ask a programmer if you don't understand this part. 4. Save. Determine Sales Price with Shipping Point You are trying to use shipping point as a key field (with sales org. Standard SAP scale pricing will not do it in that you only want the reduced price to come into effect when the order quantity is multiple of some bulk factor.

Indicates the date based on the order validity start from date And the pricing in the billing document is copied from thte sales order / Delivery document.Step 2 Change user exit MV45AFZZ. . That means your other condition types such as surcharges and discounts are also determined using the requested delivery date.Proposed pricing date based on the requested dlv. If your requirement is for PR00 to alone to be priced at delivery date then this will not work. There is a field called proposal for pricing date. Pricing date based on delivery date Used transaction VOV8.pricing date " in the Requested delivery date / pricing date / purchase order date segment. When you create your new table you will see you have two shipping points. ( T code : VOV8) You have a field" Prop. A . That was ok. This configuration is by order type. generate. How pricing date is determine in the sales order and billing document? Where is the setting? The pricing date is proposed based on the setting you make in the Sales document configuration. Step 4 Finish with the steps you did before. With the button technical view you can check which one ZZVSTEL or VSTEL. you will see in your sales order that the shipping point is filled with information. There you can select pricing date as requested delivery date.Indicates the current date as the pricing date A . Say there that field ZVSTEL should be filled with information from your shipping point.. Save. Do this under part FORM USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP. The coding should be like tkomp-zzvstel = vbap-vstel. but first maintain your new field in Condition: allowed fields.Indicates the date based on the requested delivery date B . Then you can choose the follwoing options: Blank . Step 3 Make a new table as you did before. Now.date (Header) This control is set at the document level as oppose to the condition type level (PR00).f.

billng or delivery billing.-specific Prices with Scale Display" will do. The new price is determined in the billing order. The pricing sources are generally the order. Other Pricing Reports you can tried are these: -------------------------------------------------------------------------|LR|Report title | ------------------------------------------------------------------------|01|Comparison of Price Lists Without Scale Display | |02|Comparison of Price Groups Without Scale Display | |03|Incoterms with Scale Display | |04|Incoterms Without Scale Display | |05|Price List Types Without Scale Display | |06|Price List Types with Scale Display | |07|Cust. you can use V/LD .Pricing Groups Without Scale Display | |11|Price Groups With Scale Display | . Report to Check the Entered Pricing Condition Price Which is the best transaction code to check the Pricing condition price entered in "VK11"? Other than "VK13". to display the price."07 Cust./Mat. but this values have no effect if the pricing type is B.-specific Prices W/out Scale Display | |09|Material List/Material Pricing Group with Scale Display | |10|List Mat. But if you want you can change it to other values mentioned in the drop down. In the copy control.-specific Prices with Scale Display | |08|Cust. Any other value other than B in the pricing type will take the reference document price mentioned in the pricing source field.Execute Pricing Report to check the prices entered into the Pricing Master. in the item settings you have two fields relavant for this. but for the pricing type B. One is pricing source and the other is pricing type. Normally Pricing Report .It again depends on the setting u have in the copy control from order .

S Mexico | |28|Conditions by Customer | |30|Conditions by Customer Hierarchy | |31|Price List with Release Status | |AC| | |AD| | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Mass Update of condition pricing You can update the condition pricing for a range of sales order.g. Use VA05. you have to update the prices for lots of sales orders.P. Other than using VA02 and make an Update of the conditions at item level which is a big work because you will have lots of open sales order after so many months. and at the beginning of each year.E.> Mass Change -> New Pricing (menu).|14|Taxes | |15|Material Price | |16|Individual Prices | |17|Discounts and Surcharges by Customer | |18|Discounts and Surcharges by Material | |19|Discounts and Surcharges by Price Group | |20|Discounts and Surcharges by Material Group | |21|Discounts and Surcharges by Customer/Material | |22|Discounts and Surcharges by Customer/Material Group | |23|Discounts and Surcharges by Price Group/Material | |24|Discounts and Surcharges by Price Group/Material Group | |25|VAT/ATX1 | |26|Canada/USA | |27|I. For e. if you create sales order for 15 months or so. or . select your Orders and on the result screen :click Edit.

type formula. Simply remove PR00 and it will work fine if you always use VPRS as your pricing base inside the pricing procedure. subtotal B. Function MPRF => New Pricing) Make Material Master Price of a material as sales price automatically The first method is not to set the pricing condition VPRS as statistical. Set PR00 with alt. Set VPRS to be the first step in the pricing procedure and to be subtotal B (as standard). reqt 4 Step 2 PR00 Altcty 600 Customer discounts on effort only -----Original Message----Subject: Customer discounts on effort only Hi All. . write your own abap report and use Function SD_BULK_CHANGE (check where-Used at SE37. The routine (created with transaction VOFM) is: RV64A901 FORM FRM_KONDI_WERT_600. ENDFORM. then you should use requirement routines to enable the correct price condition type at the right time. The second method involves more work as you need to write a formula (VOFM) to get that information. XKWERT = KOMP-WAVWR. 2. This is how it goes :1. Price control V for moving average price. However. which sets the value of PR00 to be equal to the subtotal B. Trace VA05 on how to fill the parameters. Price control S for standard price. We have a requirement of giving a discount to customer based on the total amount invoiced so far (across financial years). calc. It is this simple if you do not have any other "Prices" in the price procedure.if you don't want to do that Online. VPRS will reads both prices based on the price control in the material master. The pricing procedure than looks like that: Step 1 VPRS statistical. if you are using one pricing procedure where for some items you price using VPRS and some others using PR00.

and above 10% This means that discount would only start after the customer's net sale value crosses 100000.e the discount should start getting applied automatically when it reaches the first scale for which the values span few financial years. the rest being reimbursements of actual costs and hence the customer is not eligible for the discount.e. KA02. a discount of 5% should be given on 2000 i. Whenever we define our pricing procedures. we just define our own pricing procedures by using the existing condition types (i. Of this to handle your first problem that is the rebate has to be applied only on the "effort" you have to set up a line in the pricing procedure which gives the rebate basis i. Kindly help. 100. beeper charges etc). The discount should be on a graduated scale basis for example 0 . but only on the effort billed and not on reimbursements (like airfares. In the above example (invoice of 3000) say the effort billed is only 1500. K007. we remain least interested in creating our own Condition Types. Your second problem i. This I believe solves your problem of rebate only on effort. The solution for this is Using rebate condition types and suitable condition records. the discount is not based on the total amount billed so far. if the customer has been billed for 99000 and the current invoice is for 3000. What we do is.e: PR00.) & then . This I am not really sure whether it can be made possible in the invoice itself.Where do we set this up? We have seen so far the discounts are calculated based on the value of the current invoice. Another complication is that.e the value to be used for rebate cond types. For example. living expenses.200000 5% 200000 . The discount applies only to the effort and not to the reimbursements. (the rest being taken up by the lower limit for eligibility of 100000) For example the customer might have been billed say 150000 so far but actual effort billed might be only 90000.. SD Questions About Pricing Condition The Most Important Tips in Pricing For SAP SD Module to crack interviews.. K004. the rest being reimbursements.Condition Tables & Access Sequences. KF00 etc.100000 No discount 100000 . The discount is only on the 500. -----Reply Message----Subject: RE: Customer discounts on effort only Hi. But a work around is not giving the discount directly in the invoice but settling it against the rebate agreements by Credit notes periodically. visa charges.

What is the difference between Header condition and Item condition? I know item condition applies to each item in a sales document. using T-Codes is more smarter than following paths through IMG screen. .type configuration.as earlier explained for the weight/fright.Ex-Say fright is dependent on the total weight of all the items in the documents then header condition adds on weights of all items and calculates the record accordingly. Again system is not allowing to store the record in the vk31 for the condition type pr00 and access sequence pr02. So for that purpose we have to use the following T-Codes respectively : "V/05". What is the difference of VK11 and VK31 (condition records)? My condition type is PR00 and Access sequence is PR02. Difference between header and item condition . mentioned in our Pricing Procedure by using the T-Code "VK11".This feature is given to enhance the system's performane and not to create the duplcation of the work for each condition type. a) In one you can duplicate the same value throughout the document for each item.Say discount 2% at header level which is also applicable to all the items b)Second is the accumulation of the values of all the item at the header level.This is because if you see this ac seq cointains two accessses 20 and 30 having the same table no. And so obviously header condition can not have the condition record and hence access sequence. Utsav Mukherjee . But we also need to know about the Condition Tables. This means you can have same condition record for different condition types. Now it will become easy to create the same. You have two different types of the header conditions. Header condition can only be applied to an entire document. These differenes are controlled through the indicator of group condition in the cond. "V/06" & "V/07". In VK11 you can store condition record for more than one condition type.But you see there is the difference between the technical view of it for transfering the data from document field and condition field. Now when I was entering the PR00 in VK31 it shows error Table 304 is not defining for the condition type PR02. Also to inform that.as YOU CORRECTLY SAID HEADER CONDITION IS APPLICABLE FOR THE WHOLE DOCUMENT where as item is for item. After that we put the values against each Condition Types. Condition Types & Access Sequence Creation.so you can not maintain the data at VK31. But when I was entering the PR00 at VK11 it is accepting it.if you go through the menu path you will get the vk 31 as condition record from the tamplets whereas vk11 as simple condition record.utsavmukherjee143@hotmail. Document Pricing Procedure & Customer Pricing Procedure " . And in this access sequence table 304 is available. Difference between VK11 and VK31 .assign that Pricing Procedure with " Sales Area.

for PR00. if the pricing scale is maintained and pricing for 45 units comes under the scale of $100 per unit. the base value is 45 units. Eg. 5. *-. each unit is charged $100 per unit. 4.Arvind Rana In pricing procedure there are column such as requirement. if the client wants calculation type to be based on volume or wieght.Nitin Add a Field To New Condition Table in Pricing Add a field to a new condition table in Pricing (Condition Technique):I will explain you the process with below example. this is a condition required for a particular condition type to be executed. an alternate base value is confihured. *-. altbv. 3 Alternate Calculation type: this is also denoted by numbers and maintained in VOFM..How I can accomplish the following: Be able to DISALLOW Z0BP Condition type to be negative ( Invoice Block) You can modify condition type from customising. Eg. the order value comes out to be $4500..Please follow steps in below sequence- . Requirement: Denoted by nos and maintained in VOFM.SAP SD Tips by : Vishwajit Disallowing Condition Types . Alternate base value: Denoted by no. What are these and where we calculate all these values which we put. Suppose for 45 units . PR00: req 2 ie item relevant for pricing VPRS/EKO1: req 4 ie cost Rebate BAO1 Req 24/Req 25 etc 2. Eg. alternate calculation type can be configured. Eg. one the rebate for certain amount is settled the amount from the accruals get deducted. Accruals: Accruals are maintained for rebate agreements. Sales and Distribution->Basic Functions->Pricing->Pricing Control->Define Condition Types->Maintain Condition Types Change condition type ZOBP's plus/minus indicator to "A" which means only positive is allowed. it constitutes the total accumulated value which customer has earned through rebate. Subtotal: this represents where a which table a value is stored.. but if the client wants a standard base value in some casesto be assumed inspite of maintaining the scale. which can be processed for further calculation. we mark the subtotal as A. that is the base value based on which the order value is to be calculated changes. sub total altclty. 1. if this value is to be used for credt check of a customer. that is calculation is done as per unit price. and maintained in VOFM. accurals.

not in structure KOMG ('Allowed Fields for Condition Structures'). It is most common that one or other time we need to use this function while configuring multi tasking & complex Pricing Architecture. KOMP. check and activate your entries. KOMPAZ. . for example. to add Fields. Choose PSTYV as a domain. In order processing you find the user exit in Include MV45AFZZ. 3. field PSTYV was included in structure KOMP. use structure KOMKAZ instead of structure KOMPAZ and USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMK instead of USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP. In case the required combination field is not there. you can use the field labels of PSTYV. 4. Here I'm giving a simple guide to add fields to the Pricing Field Catalogues: For example you want to use field PSTYV ('Sales document item category') that is included in structure KOMP ('Pricing Communication Item') as a key for a condition table. Consider that you can also use this note as a help if you want to use other customerspecific fields as key fields in a condition table. For header fields.Try to add the filed from the field catalog. KOMKAZ. 6. field ZZPSTYV is now known in structures KOMG and KOMP because structure KOMPAZ is included in both structures. Reason and Prerequisites: For technical reasons. Condition access. however. 2. field catalog. 5. and in billing document processing you find it in Include RV60AFZZ. allowed fields. Note:Now you can use field ZZPSTYV as a key field when you create a condition table Axxx. check and activate the change you made. 'ZZ .Save. KOMG. Note:Because of the change in structure KOMPAZ. however.sales document item category' and as a field label. Proceed as follows: 1. Supply the new field you defined by including the following source code line in USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP: MOVE xxxx-PSTYV TO TKOMP-ZZPSTYV. Choose 'Conditions: Allowed fields' and include ZZPSTYV as a new entry. PSTYV are the other terms which we need to know about. Call up Transaction SPRO. the system does not propose the field in the field catalog. you can use. you can add the field through the following process to filed catalog and create the condition table. Navigate to 'Sales and Distribution -> Basic Functions -> Pricing -> Pricing Control' and execute 'Define Condition Tables'. KOMK. Call up structure KOMPAZ in the ABAP Dictionary (Transaction SE11) in the change mode and make the following entry: Component Component type: ZZPSTYV ZZPSTYV Save. Call up the ABAP Dictionary (Transaction SE11) and create data type ZZPSTYV. When you create a condition table (Transaction V/03).As a short text.

because of this group condition. When we go to the conditions section in a sales order.% Based Header Condition. .HA00 .00 Rs.Numeric value or Absolute value. 100. You maintained scales also.Manoj Mahajan Header Condition and Group Condition What are header conditions? Header conditions are those which appear in the header level of any sales order. here we add these conditions.Absolute or numeric value which applies to all items. these conditions are to be entered manually and get distributed automatically and the basis for distribution are taken from the NET VALUE of items mentioned at item level.62 No's All the material is having the material group = 01.3 No's ITEM 3 .25 No's ITEM 2 . This amount is applicable to all items. where the details of pricing is mentioned.For more information. Usage of this feature is to apply price / discount for a specific group of materials.RB00 . You maintained a discount based condition record fbased on material group ( = 01 for example). *-. 1. Header Condition: This is a manual condition which you apply to header (Condition screen) of a sales document.00 Rs. 2. Examples of header condition. . *-.150 Discount Rs. 105.27 No's ITEM 5 . 110. You are creating a sales order for a customer with five different items with different quantities as below ITEM 1 . Qty 1 .12 No's ITEM 4 .50 51 .10 11 .00 etc. it overrides the PR00 condition type. 3. In the above example total quantity is .Vivek Chokshi What is the difference between group condition and header condition? Group Condition: You can use this is feature of a condition type to apply price or discount for a material based on common property. see Transaction SPRO via the path 'Sales and Distribution -> System Modifications -> Create New Fields (Using Condition Technique) -> New Fields for Pricing' and OSS Note 21040. system add the quantities of items which have material group = 01. Whenever any Header Condition is used. .HB00 . While calculating the discount.

00 5. Discount. 105. There is a table 5 which already has Customer and Material so we can now copy and rename it or use the same table in our Pricing Procedure.25 No's Rs. Step 6. T Code VOK0 Step 1. Define your Access Sequence and include the above Table in your Access Sequence Step 3. 4. Process a sales order for a customer with these three material with different quantities. 105.Tsr What are the 8 steps involved in condition technique? . Maintain Material Group of each item is same.62 No's Rs.00 ITEM 5 ..3 No's Rs. By: Rohit Joshi It starts with an understanding of the factors that influences the Price. 5. Lets say it depends on Customer and Material. 100. 105.00 to each item irrespective of the individual quantities. 3.12 No's Rs. *-. 115. Create 3 materials. Few important things to note is following. 4. System apply a discount of Rs.= 109. Freight and Tax) and include your Access Seq. Check the outcome. Now comes your Pricing Procedure where you include include Condition Types and format. With this understanding now we will start with the Table where we will pass the above parameters. Define/Choose your Table (with the requirement parameters that influence the price) Step 2. system determines the discount value based on individual item quantity which is as below.00 ITEM 2 . 2. 110.27 No's Rs. Create a condition record for this condition type with scales.00 ITEM 4 .00 ITEM 3 . Activate the condition type as a group condition. Its always better to copy the Price Types provided by SAP. Maintain Condition Records for your Condition Types I guess you can make it 8 Steps by dividing some of the main steps. Is it clear now. Now comes Procedure Determination where you specify the Document Pricing Procedure and Customer Pricing Procedure along with Sales Organisation. Define your Condition Type (There are four Price Types Basic Price. Step 4. Distribution Channel. Step 5. If you have not activated the group condition feature. Discount ITEM 1 . Just try a sales order and see the out come Procedure to Test: 1.

Hope it helps.Percent discount (HA00) . While Creating Access Sequence. How it is happening? Any formula is there? Header Conditions . 2. VA01 .Absolute discount (HB00) . Further Group condition: Indicates whether the system calculates the basis for the scale value from more than one item in the document. Group Condition: Group conditions are helpfull incase of discounts. So the Header freight is splitting irregularly for two line items (in item conditions) . Checks for changing the condition manually are unaffected by this. If you access V/06 and the header condition type. Always remember that your Procedure Determination has only Basic Price as Condition Type 6. Common questions: We are using the Freight in Header Condition.1.Freight (HD00) .Ensure that you have the right Document Pricing Procedure from here 3. Header conditions are entered manually in order processing. check your Fields and ensure that they appear with any warning (Highlighted in Red) 4. XD01 .Automatic pricing does not take header conditions into account.does not have any access sequence . Do not forget to mention the Range (From To) while creating your Pricing Procedure. it is possible to enter the condition type in the header condition screen. If group condition is selected then the discount percentage or quantity is applicable for the total sum of the quantity in the PO for those materials belonging to the same material group. R/3 includes the following header conditions: .Always ensure that you pick the right Customer Pricing Procedure from here.Sales Order . line item wise.field Group condition is selected .Create Customer .Order value (HM00) Header Condition: If this condition is marked as a header condition. you can see that the condition type . it will be distributed proportionately. Suppose if two materials of same matl grp have discounts for 100 qty and above but in PO if the two matls are bieng procured for 50 qty then they cant avail discounts but if group condition is selected then the sum of the quantity of both matl of same matl group is considered (50 + 50) and discount can be availed for 100 qty. I maintained two line items in the Sales Order. I made most of the mistakes that appear above. Do not forget to mention your Access Sequence while defining your Condition Type 5. you can not create condition records for them in the standard system. The nature of header condition is that whatever value you are giving in sale order / billing.

. . However. Condition 2 is available in the standard R/3 System.g. That is the standard behaviour of the header condition type. What you are experiencing with Fixed Amount Header conditions is standard behaviour.for an individual condition record (e.317112 Behavior of conditions w/ calculation rule B changed .84605 Transfer absolute amount condition to billing doc. the discount is not valid if the condition exclusion indicator is set. To do this. you must follow two steps: You must set a condition exclusion indicator for the price. Based on whether the group condition field is ticked on or off. Therefore. a specific customer can buy the material for 100 USD. with condition type PR00) when defining a condition type in SD Customizing . possibly irrespective of different weight which may not be logical. If this condition is set. Please see below Notes: . the customer should not also have a discount of 10 USD per 100 pieces.485740 Conditions with fixed amount in copy activities To achieve what you wish (absolute amount). This means that if a condition record contains condition supplements they will be taken into account during pricing. the same freight amount will be copied to each item. Material 4711 costs 150 USD. The condition exclusion indicator is not valid for condition supplements.g. this discount is to be excluded from pricing.25144 Freight conditions during milestone billing What is meant by condition exclusion for Condition types and records? Condition Exclusion The system can exclude conditions so that they are not taken into account during pricing in sales documents. It will be proportionately distributed on each item on the basis of weight.for all condition records of a condition type (e. it will either split the header condition value to the items on pro-rata basis or it will just duplicate the header value to all the items. You can do this in two ways: If you want to set the condition exclusion indicator a follows then you specify it: . only for material 4711) in the detail screen of a condition record (in the Condition exclusion field) You must set a condition for the discount in the pricing procedure in Customizing for sales. Some customers receive a discount of 10 USD per 100 pieces.25020 Value changes during over/underdelivery .876617 FAQ: Header conditions / Header condition screen . If you will uncheck the group condition field. Since this is a particularly good price. This is a Manual condition and you have to enter it in the header screen.Normally Freight Header condition like condition type "HD00" is calculated on the basis of weight. solution is in the below Notes: .

you can see that the condition offering the most favorable discount to the customer is represented in the pricing procedure.Sales & Distribution . This can be seen by double clicking on the condition type K005. while another condition type K005 has offered a real value discount of $10. freight condition types. Menu path – IMG . which is K007 and makes the other discount K005 inactive. there is the risk that the customer will receive all the relevant discounts and thus purchase the product for a lower price than he should. There are four possible methods of using condition exclusion groups – A – best condition between the condition types B – best condition within the condition types C – best condition between the two exclusion groups D – exclusive E – least favorable within the condition type F – least favorable within the two exclusion groups Configuring ‘Condition Exclusion Groups’ First step is to define a ‘condition exclusion group’ by using a four character alpha numeric key. For instance. Should the discounts be automatically determined. Next step is to assign the relevant condition types to the exclusion groups such as discount condition types. . condition type K007 has offered a discount of 10% off the sale price or a real value of $30. but instead only receives the best of the available discount condition types. where you can find a entry saying ‘Inactive A condition exclusion item’. proceed with assigning the condition exclusion group to the relevant pricing procedure. a sales order is created using the pricing procedure that the exclusion group is assigned to. After completing the assignment of the condition types to the exclusion group. If for example. It is important to note that the condition types you want the system to compare must exist in the pricing procedure and must have valid condition records created for them.Condition Exclusion Group – In any normal situation there could be more than one condition type in a pricing procedure offering a discount to a customer. The system then takes the best discount for the customer between the two. By using ‘condition exclusion groups’ you can ensure that the customer does not receive all the discounts.Basic functions – pricing – condition exclusion – condition exclusion for groups of conditions (OV31). A condition exclusion group is merely a grouping of condition types that are compared to each other during pricing and result in the exclusion of particular condition types within a group or entire groups.

You have to mark the "condition index" check box in the condition type and you have to activate the index in customization.. We can get details of all the condition types including the scales. From pricing report you can know which condition records exist for freight charges 3. Condition Index Condition index is very useful for searching the condition record for a customer. It becomes easier and faster to search for condition records for a customer or material just like it become easier to search a topics in the book with help of index. the system will merely find the first condition record and stop searching for other records. The sales personnel use it to 1. These kind of reports are generally required by the Top Management for periodical review // Finance team for price control // Master data team for record purposes // Process audits by Internal/external agency // Of late. Sales org/Dc/Division/Plant /material etc wise.e. It informs you about the customer specific price agreements that were made within a certain period 2.especially the change records for prices. Though all the above T Codes and there are many More standard SAP Reports have very high utility. The selection criteria would be as per the Key combination which you select in the IMG screen You get following information from pricing report.After selecting the pricing procedure for which you want the condition exclusion to be active. Clients prefer customized reports when it comes to pricing reports . Otherwise. 1. get information for price (discounts) that existed at previous period (Say June 200X) 2.all Z programs and Transactions.. . Which condition records exist for customers in a particular region or country You can create your own pricing reports with V/LA. Inform potential buyer about the current price (and discounts) 3. We can get the details as per our requirement i.. This can be customized. The most important thing to remember here is to “deactivate” the Exclusive Indicator on the access sequence assigned to that condition type. Also V/LD is very useful. When using the condition exclusion group to find the best condition record in a condition type – only use one condition type per exclusion group. select the folder ‘Exclusion’ where you can assign the relevant condition exclusion procedure to the relevant condition exclusion group. What is difference between pricing report & condition index? Pricing Report: A Pricing report basically helps to get the list of all the pricing details which we have maintained in the system. it is not widely used. Review price and discounts. for every SOX audit done in the company.

Here you can put value 10 and save it. you will find a column "N". based on certain calculation this value is taken as base. If you have to calculate price of a material then you have to have a base value for it. Condition base value is a concept used in pricing procedure and actual term used is alternate condition base value. system will give the discount to the first 10 orders. Conditional amount . So you create a routine which will do the mathematical operations in the routine and derive you a value which is now used as the base value for calculating the condition value for a particular condition type. For the number of units ordered depending on the condition amount mentioned this value is derived. Go to transaction V/08 here you select pricing procedure then go in to the control data of the pricing procedure here you can find Alter native Condition Base Value in the 14th column of the pricing procedure control data. What is the difference between: 1. Where does the standard condition base value (Default one) is determined for a Condition type? First check the Material Master UOM Conversion . You may also create the condition record for discount through VK31. Normally you take the condition value of the base price of the material to calculate the value. Now.Additional Data . 3. 3. Now go to change(VK32). This is a formula assigned to a condition type in order to promote an alternate base value for the calculation of the value. For e. you don't want to take the base value and take other value as base value which are derived on some formula. Conditional amount 1. Conditional value. in additional data put "maximum number of orders" as 10.Units of Measure. This is maximum number of order field. scroll to the right. Now. As per my understanding there is Alternative Condition Base Value. 2. in your discount condition type(V/06) activate the "condition update" check box. Second. First. if you want to calculate the discount of 10 % for a material then you have to have a base value on which this 10% is calculated. in the condition record. It is a routine which is assigned to the condition type in the pricing procedure. Conditional base value When a value is derived for a condition type. Conditional value.You can set the discount for fast ten orders through "condition update". Conditional base value 2.g.

If the system distributes the absolute header discount according to volume based on the Alternative formula for condition base value . when checked in analysis it says requirement 013 is not fulfilled. distributed in the standard system according to the cumulative value of the items. a header discount of $30 results in the following discounts: Item Value Volume . but in pricing procedure I've assigned the requirement as 013.cal type-16. condition base value. for example. This requirement can be used to exclude the system from accessing the condition type and trying to determine the value. alt. In sales order Diff condition type is not coming. 1) What is the role of alternative calculation type. when the value for alternative condition base value and alternative calculation type is mention in pricing procedure? **Alternative Calculation Type:** This function allows you use a formula as an alternative in finding the value of the condition type. alt CBV-4. Alternative condition base value The alternative condition base value is a formula assigned to a condition type in order to promote an alternative base value for the calculation of a value. Example An absolute header discount is. disc. requirement in pricing procedure? 2) Where do we define value for alternative condition base value and alternative calculation type so that system picks up different value. Please refer to the following documentation for requirement 013: . This can be used to specify that the condition type should only be accessed if the customer has a low risk credit. Requirement This function is used to assign a requirement to the condition type. Volume disc. instead of standard condition technique.This is nothing but the unit list price what you are mentioning for the line item. this can be used to calculate complex tax structures. 1 $1000 2 cbm 2 $500 4 cbm Stand.(With Formula) $20 $10 $10 $20 Condition formula for alternative calculation type Alternative formula to the formula in the standard system that determines a condition.

Condition type DIFF was delivered to perform the rounding at the end of the pricing procedure with the total value. This requirement can be assigned to the condition type in the pricing procedure that is used to calculate the difference when rounding.RE LV61A013 Title Rounding as per Table T001R Purpose This is an example of a pricing requirement. Formula '16' was delivered along with condition type DIFF to support the rounding unit rules that can be defined in T001R for company code / currency combinations. Using this requirement. In-17 c. This type of formula can be used to influence the value shown for the condition in pricing. Formula '17' was delivered so that a condition value could be rounded off according to the rounding unit rules (e. Go to v/08 maintain in condition base value 16 routine. plus 5 or 10 or 100 units) that can be defined in T001R for . then in the t-code ob90 you can maintain that. Using formula '16'. A condition value formula is assigned to a condition type or value line in the pricing procedure. Please check the customizing table T001R.base value Round according to T001R Purpose This is an example of a condition value formula. The user also assigns pricing requirement '13' to the condition type DIFF in the pricing procedure so that the condition is only calculated when a corresponding entry has been maintained in the table T001R.g. This type of formula can be used to influence the value shown for the condition in pricing. A condition value formula is assigned to a condition type or value line in the pricing procedure. the difference is only calculated when necessary. In the document pricing procedure. Here maintain the rounding unit which will be stored in Table T001R. Example A company has the requirement to carry out rounding for certain company code and currency combinations. Table T001R stores the rounding rules for company code and currency combinations. Purpose This is an example of a condition value formula. or try this go to IMG path --> SAP Netweaver --> General Settings --> Currencies --> Define rounding rules for currencies. the user has configured the SAP delivered condition type DIFF to calculate the difference when rounding occurs. This information is stored in Table T001R. the system computes the rounded value and assigns the difference to the condition type DIFF. This requirement is met if an entry has been made in the 'Unit to be rounded up to' field in Table T001R.

and rounding rule which you have created. This condition table is created using the allowed fields from the field catalog. For rounding profile. one may find that a new field may not be in the list of available fields. the condition value will always be rounded using T001R. such as VBAK and VBAP (for the order transaction). one can add the fields from the list of available fields. When formula '17' is assigned to a condition type. KOMG New Fields in Pricing To use a field in pricing. Assign created Rounding profile in info record also UOM group Maintain minimum order qty as 1 Rol and Order unit as ROL in Info record In material master maintain conversion as 1 Rol = 3500 yards How To Create Field in KOMP. one creates a condition table. Table KOMG contains the fields of tables . one must create new fields for pricing.company code / currency combinations. These tables contain the header and item data for pricing respectively. However. Where I can do setting of rounding profile for a new created condition type? 1) Create Rounding rule ( Unit of measure rounding rules ) Path : Materials --> SPRO Quantity Optimizing and Allowed --> Order Optimizing --> Purchasing --> Management Unit of Measure Rounding Rules --> Logistics Units of Measure Here give new rounding rule and % rounding up and down values 2) Create Unit of measure groups Path : Order Optimizing --> Purchasing --> Materials Management --> SPRO Unit of Measure --> Quantity Optimizing and Allowed Logistics Units of Measure Groups Create new group for YD and ROL 3) Dynamic rounding profile Path : Order Optimizing --> Purchasing --> Materials Management --> SPRO Maintain Rounding --> Quantity Optimizing and Allowed Logistics Units of Measure Profile Here give Rounding profile name and plant and click on Dynamic to create new profile In next screen give desc. Many of the fields from these tables are available in the field catalog. For this reason. They are called KOM “x” because they are communications structures used to communicate the transaction data with the pricing procedure. Should the fields one requires not be included in the list of allowed fields. rounding off method as 2. The field catalog is a structure (KOMG) that consists of two tables (KOMK and KOMP). The document and item data in SD is stored in data tables.

when you add the field. You may have to use an ABAP skill to assist you.KOMK and KOMP. Menu Path The menu path here is IMG. Sales and distribution. Pricing occurs in the order and in the invoice. New fields for pricing. Create new fields (using the condition technique). Since this relates to the material. so you need to put this code in both places. write the ABAP code in user exit . This means that the field you require cannot be used in pricing because there is no communication of this field from the transaction to the pricing procedure via the communication structures. In ABAP. For the order transaction. If the field is from the item table (for example. and then write the ABAP code to transfer the data in the field from the transaction tables to the communication structure. so you would add the field to the KOMPAZ include table. The base material is a field on the material master basic data screen and is defined as MARA-WRKST. use the same domain as in the field in the original table MARAWRKST. After adding the field. Follow these steps: 1.” Therefore. To use a field not defined in the field catalog. you need to add this field to the KOMK or KOMP structures. the order table VBAK). the order item table VBAP). Writing the ABAP Code The field in the communications structure will be blank unless the ABAP code transfers the data from the material master to the field KOMPZZWRKST. Adding the Field to KOMK and KOMP This process requires some knowledge of the ABAP dictionary and how to use the ABAP dictionary to create and change fields and tables. Note When you add a field to these tables. Write the code in the user exit to read the transaction data and transfer it to the KOM “x” structures. This field is not available in the field catalog and can be used in condition tables. System modification. it is at the item level. 2. you’ll need to add it to the include table KOMKAZ in table KOMK. the field you add would be ZZWRKST. you’ll need to add it to the include table KOMPAZ in table KOMP. If you require a field that is not in KOMG. Let’s say you need to use the “base material” to define a price and the base material is not in the pricing field catalog. it must start with “ZZ. If the field is from the header table (for example. generate the structure KOMP. Create the field in the KOMK (header data) and KOMP (item data) tables using the standard includes provided for this requirement. it means that it is not in KOMK or KOMP.

If you are writing the code for a field at the header level. Choose Order Create (VA01). the sales area. Enter the following data: .Order quantities for the materials . If you enter a sold-to party that is also a unique ship-to party. you would use the user exits that end with TKOMK. which you entered in the overview screen. Enter the order type and. distribution channel. a dialog box appears where you can choose the one you require. If there are several sales areas for that particular sold-to or ship-to party.Sold-to party or ship-to party If you only enter a ship-to party. .Sales. you can choose the right sales area in the following dialog box.Choose Enter. division) are derived from the sold-to or ship-to parties.Material numbers . The sales areas (sales organization. Note : The TKOMP is for the item level. you defined several unloading points or several ship-to parties in the customer master record of the sold-to party. For the billing transaction. write the ABAP code in user exit USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP in RV60AFZZ. Choose Enter. The ABAP code would select the Base material field from the material master table using the material from table VBAP/VBRP.USEREXIT_PRICING_PREPARE_TKOMP in include program MV45AFZZ. Sales Order What are the steps to create a sales order? To create a standard sales order.Customer purchase order number . The system then copies the selected sales area into the entry screen. This means that you do not have to enter the sales area when you create a sales document. to derive the sales area. the system uses this to determine the sold-to party and if necessary. It would then transfer this field to the structure TKOMP from MOVE MARAWRKST to TKOMP-ZZWRKST. The system can display alternatives for any or all of the following data: – . the organizational data. proceed as follows: In the initial screen. the system automatically copies it as such and informs you in the status bar. for distribution channel and the division are usually proposed from user-defined parameters. the system displays the alternatives in a dialog box. for example. An error message appears in the status bar to inform you if the system is not able to determine a sold-to party. if necessary. If.Sales and distribution . The values for sales organization. choose Logistics . If you do not specify a sales area in the initial screen. the system uses the sold-to or shipto parties. Entries for the sales office and the sales group are optional. If there are several sold-to parties or sales areas for one ship-to party.

Ship-to party .. In the General Control Section.Bill-to party Select the valid data from these proposals by positioning the cursor on the line and choosing Choose.OR . look for the field Check Purchase Order No and put in "A". As soon as you have selected this data.Standard Order.RE . If you want to enter further data for the header or items.Returns etc. Verify the Sales order type configuration with the following path: IMG: Sales and Distribution --> Sales --> Sales Docs --> Sales Doc Hdr --> Define Sales Doc Types (transaction vov8) will let you control this by sales document type. default First Date was always today. . Before today.Unloading point . The date is control by each Sales Order Type for each Sales Document type whether is it a . 2.Payer . Usually. . after checking. Save your document. default First Date wasn't today. choose the corresponding menu entry. it displays a screen on which you can choose between several delivery proposals. select the items before you choose a menu entry. it is very unlikely that the system will mis-behaved after one day. If the system carries out an availability check and finds that there is insufficient stock for an order item to be delivered on the requested date. Nobody change system configuration. If you want to change data for the items. You can activated the check for duplicate purchase order with "VOV8". the material data that you have entered is displayed. you will find that someone have actually change the configuration as it could not be a software bug since you have been using it for quite sometime without any problems. Enter all necessary data. why? Note: 1. Although you mention that nobody change the system configuration. Default First Date is not Today When end user created a new sales order with VA01. Duplicate customer purchase order If you are facing a problem with duplicate customer purchase order as your company does not allowed a same customer purchase order with the same sales order type. You can find more information about this in Reactions to the Availability Check in Sales Documents.

Check in OVLZ ---> In Pick/pack time wrkdys. system will allow to do PGI only after 5 days from the date of order created. If it is mentioned any days. For example. Check in material master MRP2 view how many days are maintained for the fields InHouse production and GR Processing Time. type and Double-Click. Code: OVLZ Field: Pick/pack time wrkdys whether you have maintained any value. The other possibility could be holidays. 4. I have created a sales order for 6 Tons. any value is maintained there. even if stock is available on the same day of order creation. if 5 is given in this field..pick/pack times. Code: VOV8 Select your Sales Doc. What could be the reason? The reason could be there should be processing times configured in the system like. 3. I'm using service material in my sales order and I need the schedule line to confirm the quantity always in the actual day (not depending on the delivery date). This should be blank if you want the system to propose current day for delivery date. select your sale order type and check the Field "Lead Time in Days". transit time. After creating sales order system should show as Doc date for confirming quantity for dispatch but it is showing the next day in the schedule line. Please check the shipping point and also the route for different lead times. Next check the lead times. T. Code: OVZ9 Checked the Box: Check without RLT . In Tab: Shipping. Note: There are few more settings that you may check: 1. I mean it is unrestricted stock. Check Box: Immediate Delivery (press F1 to read more about this functionality).There is one field (Lead time in days) which "specify the number of days after the current date that the proposal for the requested delivery date in the sales document should be". for that you can go to the schedule line of the item and click on the Procurement tab. It should have been blank 2. First check what the requested delivery date you have put in the order. . T. T. SAP SD User Ticket: Confirm quantity date is next day. Also go to VOV8. Code: VOV8 Check how many days mentioned in Lead time in Days. remove it. T.I have a stock of 10 Tons which is not reserved for any Sales order.

. to prevent orders from being entered for parts to be discontinued. Define whether the Material can be used at which Sales and Distribution process Here you define how the system responds when entering a sales and distribution document with this material in the differenet Sales and Distribution Process Flow. the sales and distribution document cannot be entered on the basis of the material status) Assign a Cost Center manually in a Sales Order (VBAK-KOSTL) The Cost Center Determination settings is in OVF3 . OR To temporary block the creation of Sales Order for a certain materials. double click on sales order type. Select the View Sales: Sales Org.Look and tick the fields Propose delivery date and Propose PO date. Data 1 and fill in the Delivery Plant. You can set three types of reponse for each Sales and Distribution process :1. Set the material status parameters in transaction SM30. you need to input the Delivery Plant field for each Materials that you want the system to propose the default date.but there are some cases where the Cost Center must be exceptionally changed. no dialog 2. warning when entering the document 3. To change the Materials field Delivery Plant: Goto MM02. After making the necessary IMG changes.. Table Views V_TVMS. You can use the material status. for example.Goto VOV8. Follows this step to set the default Sales Order Type proposal date: . error message (that is. . Click Maintain and double click into the Materials Status code. try creating a new sales order for the material and SAP will auto proposed all the dates in the sales order.Auto proposed all the dates when creating Sales Order How can I make the system auto create all the Sales Order date during creation? Each Sales Order can have different date proposal settings. Testing: Now.

Deliveries of advertising materials You can also make cost center allocation dependent on the order reason. 2. the sales documents at schedule line level. OVZG . The system checks the availability of the goods based on the requested delivery date of the customer and creates MRP records which contain all necessary information for passing on to planning.Free of Charge. you have to carry out the following steps: 1.Requirement class . The cost center are assign for such business transactions as : . The transfer of requirements must be switched on at requirements class level. You must define a check group. It is possible to have this check group proposed for the initial creation of a material master record. Each requirement type has to be allocated to one requirement class only. so it would not work if cost center is needed on the line item. 3. Note that a plant must exist for transfer of requirements to be carried out at document item level. However the standard SAP works only at the header level though. 4.If the document category for order type in IMG VOV8 is defined to be "I" which belong to order type FD .Transfer of Requirements The MRP department is informed about the quantities and deadlines by which incoming orders should be delivered. you can specify an order reason and assign a cost center to an order reason.Deliv. for example: Order reason: Damage in transit Order reason: Free sample Both the IMG settings are done in transaction OVF3. Alternatively. then the field cost center is active for input during transaction VA01.Returns . It ensures that the goods are available in time for the delivery. Materials planning transfers the reported requirements and creates orders or purchase requisitions from them etc.Free deliveries . either with/without the order reason. Sales and Distribution . For controlling transfer of requirements.

Schedule line category OVZ2 .the results analysis key.Define the checking group that the system proposes when you create a new material master record. This can be configured by creating requirement class and requirement type and in the corresponding schedule line category requirement had to be checked. Then PP can do procure or produce the goods.whether the requirements are relevant for MRP. Whether an availability check and a transfer of requirements is carried out for a transaction (for sales documents.Assignment of requirement type to Transaction V_TVEP_V . If the availability of goods is not there. Explain transfer of requirement? How it works and how to configure? It specifies the following points: 1.whether an availability check and a transfer of requirements is carried out for a transaction (for sales documents. 5. fine tuning using the schedule line category is possible). Whether the requirements are relevant for MRP.Define Checking Group V_TMVFU .whether an item is to be settled to an auxiliary account assignment. then the system check for availability of goods. 3. The system checks the availability of the goods based on the requested delivery date of the customer and creates MRP records which contain all necessary information for passing on to planning. (Use transaction SM30 for V_* configuration) OVZH .It specifies the following points: . 4. The settlement profile. then the system creates a TOR for the supply of goods to PP. 6. . You can overwrite the default value for the checking group in the material master record. fine tuning using the schedule line category is possible). It ensures that the goods are available in time for the delivery. The results analysis key. The MRP department is informed about the quantities and deadlines by which incoming orders should be delivered. . . The allocation indicator from the sales view which controls the settlement of customer requirements with requirements. Whether an item is to be settled to an auxiliary account assignment. 2.the settlement profile.Requirements type V_TVEPZ_V . When a sales order is raised.the allocation indicator from the sales view which controls the settlement of customer requirements with requirements . . .

4.Materials planning transfers the reported requirements and creates orders or purchase requisitions from them etc. . For performing transfer of requirements. Note that the requirements classes are also used in production so you should coordinate any changes to the requirements classes with production. you have to carry out the following steps: 1. For the sales document types. requirements class are determined in the strategy group so all changes made there should also be coordinated with production. The transfer of requirements must be switched on at requirements class level. In the standard SAP R/3 System. Each requirement type has to be allocated to one requirement class only. tax condition type "MWST" for taxes on sales and purchases).check group .schedule line category The transfer of requirements is controlled globally using the requirements class which is derived from the requirements type for all sales document types. The following sections on the transfer of requirements describe how to control the transfer of requirements. therefore. fine tuning is also possible at schedule line level. Assign the plant for Tax Determination in OX10. The transfer of requirements is basically dependent upon the following factors: . Define Tax Determination Rules You specify the valid tax types in transaction OVK1. 3. eventually. Requirements transferred to planning are further processed in the module MM. This fine tuning is described in the section "Defining the procedure for each schedule line category". using the country key. You must define a check group. The requirements type and. 2. It is possible to have this check group proposed for the initial creation of a material master record. you will maintain the tax code in Customer Master.requirement class . Define the Customer Taxes in OVK3. You must. The SAP System determines the taxes automatically within pricing. Note that a plant must exist for transfer of requirements to be carried out at document item level. the sales documents at schedule line level. coordinate the transfer of requirements with the module MM. More than one tax type can be defined for a country by defining the sequence.requirements type . the SAP System recognizes which tax type is valid for a plant and thus which taxes are relevant when creating an SD document. the elements of tax calculation are predefined (for example.

the MWST condition Defintions. Tax Code in Customer Master / Sales Order How can we maintain the Tax Code (Tax code .D (Not possible to process Manually). if you are selling a goods which are free for tax to any customer. while processing a sales order. the field for 'Manual Entries'.Domestic Taxes/Export Taxes Condition Type Customer Taxes 0 0 1 1 MWST Material Taxes 0 1 0 1 Rate Taxes 0% 0% 0% 9% In this example. if both the Customer Master and Material Master Tax code is 1. which are tax liable and which are tax exempeted. you must identify. put the Tax Indicator (at MMR as '0'). which will then be maintain in Material Master. whether is fully liable for tax or expemted (in case of Defence Customer) 2) There are few parameteres which we apply tax condition. as a SAP standard Best Practises. 5) In anycase. VK12 . If your material is tax liable pur the Tax Indicator (at MMR as 1).which we maintain in MWST Condtion Records) in Customer Master or in Sales Order? There are few points which I would like to remind you: 1) MWST is a tax condition which is applied to customer to whom we are selling. Accordingly.Define the Material Taxes in OVK4. 3) Now. it would be marked as . at VK11 you need to mainatain your pricning conditions with all the combinations like: 10 11 01 00 4) While maintaining your Material Master Records or Cusotmer Master Records. you define the Tax Determination in VK12. The rate of tax is depend on various parameteres. you must retrieve a Tax condition record from SAP database only and not entered Manually. For example :MWST GST MWST GST 0 Tax Exempt 1 Liable for Taxes Now. Whether customer is tax liable? Whether material is tax exempted? For example. Tax will be included when you create the Sales Order. at V/06. If your customer is not liable for tax at all (like the case of Indian Defence organisations) put the Tax Indicator (at CMR as 0) or 1 in case fully tax liable. .

normally. 2-LST4% & 3-LST0%.Due to this setting. At the point of sales from one state. You need to include the condition type for country IN in 'Define tax determin rule'. sales tax will be levied once the sales is registered there. & consignment is despatched to the Ship to party.4% & 0%. 1 for taxable & 2 for not taxable. The rates are defined by the respective state governments. And in Cusotmer Master. Stock transfer : This does not attract any sales tax. Local sales tax & central sales tax. you can only maintain Tax Indicator and not Tax Code. 6) In case your client insists for Manual entry of Tax code during Sales Order processing. I will chose the access where the combinations of customer & material tax classifications are available. in which the CST condition type is JIN1 & the LST is probably JIN2. you can change the field at point 5) above to C-Manual entry is priority instead of D. Same path : But go to Tax relevancy of master records where you configure the condition type & options of rates that will flow to these masters. the LST that is applicable by the Ship to party further will not be applicable in all probability to be captured in SAP. I will have two options for material master here. Let's say. One needs to understand here properly as u need to have unique combinations for picking the sales tax rates. It's a zero value invoice. There are two types of sales taxes. To do this config.e. Taxation Explain with an example I'm assuming that. the ST goes to that state govt. For this case. but the basic prices needed to be mentioned. S&D >Basic fn. delivering plant & ship to party are within the same state. Local sales tax is intra state whereas CST is inter state. When I create master records for LST thru VK11 for JIN2. There may be surcharge cond types as well which will calculate the amount on either JIN1 or JIN2. The selling organisations normally needs to register with the sales tax authority of the respective state to have a warehouse or D plant to avoid the double taxation for their dealers/distributors. 2. Now. If this access does . procedure > Maintain Pric proc. > Pricing > Pricing control > Define & assign Pric.7 is Factory sale with formula-JFACT. the country is India and based on its requirement: Sales tax is a state government revenue. I will have 1-LST 2%. the LST rates are 2%. you cannot maintain Condition tax code during sales order processing. Once that consignment is received at the ship to party state. 3. > Taxes. The consignment is transferred from one D plant to another D plant irrespective of inter/intra state sales. The tax rates are normally driven from the Tax classification of Customer & Material access. The invoice that is accompanied with the consignment thus shall not have any final value. I will try to demonstrate the smallest example. For config : 1. Example of CST : The Delivering plant & Ship to party geographic locations are 2 different states.SPRO > S&D > Basic fn. Example of LST : Point of sale i. For customer master. the pricing procedure that is there in 4.

of schedule lines. rates are flown from the tax codes. Also send you 1-2 weeks of individual FIRM ship dates . Rate Tax code 1 1 2% A1 2 1 4% A1 3 1 0% A1 Remember. Sales Order Mass Change I am a SAP SD consultant and recently faced with two new terms. price. It comes down to the customer not knowing exactly what they need next week. Forecast forwards the schedule lines to planning (seen in MD04) and JIT passes them to shipping (VL10). mass order change and ALV . (2) Cumulative Quantities are tracked and influence how the schedule agreement passes requirements to both forecasting and shipping. Material tax claasi.not exist create it under an access sequence. Outside of that they can really cause trouble regarding daily maintenance. year end processing. Schedule agreements are very nice when the customer sends EDI data (830s = forecast or 862s = JITs). cum qty corrections. The customer will provide you 4-10 weekly buckets (usually a Monday date) of future forecast qtys. They can be identical or different. One alternative would be to use customer independent requirements . etc. I also need to know about the transaction code.which are entered on the JIT. quantity. missing requirements. There are a couple major differences: (1) . There is transaction MASS which can be used to carry out mass changes in the sales order and other objects. The forecasted qtys they sent last week should account for this. One Forecast & the other JIT. monthly forecasting qtys and entering standard sales orders (with or without multiple schedule lines) to represent the true firm qtys. SAP SD: Scheduling Agreement Vs Contract A schedule agreement contains details of a delivery schedule but a contract just contains quantity and price information and no details of specific delivery dates What's the difference between schedulling agreement with normal order? What's the condition for us to choose schedule line or order? Both of them contains schedule line. But normally this is standard. Cumulative qtys reset at year end unless you've got a customer calendar or you've modified standard SAP userexits to not reset.Schedule agreements allow you to have 2 different sets of schedule lines (VBEPABART). Cust-Tax classi. Tax codes can be created thru T code FTXP. . This is normally a FI job. Standard SAP you should have two sets of tabs . where your lead times are 5+ days. but they don't want to suprise you with a large order qty. These qtys are sometimes requested by the customer on ASNs.entering the weekly. The condition records will look like. Typically these are used for component supplier customers (namely Automotive).

(for example. ask them to deactivate the MODCHECKS still you are done with mass maintenance & activate them again. Note: If you have any user exits that affect the results. export the spool file to a spreadsheet. click on "Enter new field values" -click on "sales order item data" tab and choose the field you want to change. Check: Go to [SM37] and see the status of the job you are running and once finished. Then do the mass maintenance and compare the results with this one. move the fields you want to the "select fields" using arrows.From the Pool. you see all the old values are changed to new values. and orders should work the same way too. -click on "change field values" button. If they match. you see the new value of the plant you entered at the top and the old values of item 10 are below. 4)From mass maintenace menu. (suppose your selection criteria fields are from "sales order header data" table and the field you want to change. is in "item data" table) 3) Put in the sales documents(21000000.List will be provide for changes Sel Chg Fld: Billing Date Set new billing date value in the New Values field Click on lower billing date column Click on Carry out a Mass Change button Click on Save button . Before you do mass maintenance. Then execute. go to the particular table in [se16] and get the results. -save Note: it will take some time depending on how many records you have. 21000001) you want to change and also the items(10) you want to change. then you are good to go. I have done mass change for customers.Or you can just select by document numbers (May be more efficient) Execute . . 1) Try t-code [MASS] and select sales orders & execute 2) Choose the table or tables for your selection criteria and also for fields you want to change. I want to change plant for item 10) -enter the new value (of the plant to be) -click on "Adopt" and execute 5)In "sales order item data" tab.click on " choose selection fields" button .Mass Maintenance: (Use to change multiple fields in multiple documents at the same time). Is there a way to change the billing date on a ton of sales orders with same old billing date to a same new billing date? This can be done using the mass transaction: Transaction: MASS Object Type: BUS2032 Tables: SD Document: Business item data Sel Field: Billing Date (MASSSDHE and MASSSDPO) .

Select B. I have 100000 sales orders whith an incorrect price and I would like to do a massive condition update with pricing type "B" (Carry out new pricing). Balraj G Saigal In order to emulate a release strategy similar to purchase orders you can use the status profile in sales documents (BS02). Release strategy for Sales order Is it possible to have release strategy for sales order? Satish C Jha As such SAP standard does not provide release strategy for sales orders similar to purchase orders. Here you have a consignment pickup order and a consignment pickup delivery. It will re-price all the sales orders. Consignment Sales Process in SAP The consignment process in SAP standard consist of four small processes: Consignment fillup (send materials to customer consignment). IMG-Sales and distribution-Sales-Sales documentsDefine and assign status profile. However this requirement of your can be satisfied through authorisation profiles.Suggestion is to test this on a few orders in your development system to get a feel on how this works before applying this to any production data. Is there a transaction or program for this? Go to VA05 execute the report. (the flow is very similar to a normal RE flow. but the materials are returned to the consignment stock instead of plant stock returns). Select all sales orders you want to update the price. Consignment issue (issue materials from customer consignment to the customer). what I mean to say is that the sale order to be kept incomplete by the person who does not have the required authorisation & the person with proper authorisation will complete it for further processing. (the flow is very similar to a normal OR flow. consignment return delivery and a consignment return invoice. This is only one way of meeting your requirement. but the materials are issued from the consignment stock instead of plant stock unrestricted). Here you have a consignment issue order. consignment issue delivery and a consignment issue invoice. Here you have a consignment fillup order and a consignment fillup delivery. Consignment return (return materials from customer ownership to customer consignment). Go to the Menu EDIT --> MASS Change ---> New Pricing. Consignment pickup (pickup consignment stock and move it to plant stock). You can try for one or two order initially check the results and if it is OK. System will display all the repricing options. then you can do for others. . Here you have a consignment return order. MASS is a very powerful tool.

Consignment Return: Customer found that some goods are damaged or he not able to sold the goods he want to send it back. that you are creating this document. you are assigning the delivery documnt and billing document to the sales document. return billing. document flow is sales order ---. special stock. you will set movement type 631 & set for availability check and TOR. It will not be relevent for billing and pricing because you are not charging money for these goods in this step. you will create return order. If he returns the stock you will accept the stock to take it back. 1. your setting is 633 movement type. 3.delivery item category. Consignment Issue. 4. Consignment fill up: Sales document type is KB Item category KBN shedule line category E1 In this step. Your setting schedule line item category: 634 movement type. returns. special stock. Once the customer informed you that he used all the goods or partial goods then you will create consignment issue for used goods. In schedule line category. In schedule line category. Consignment Pick up: Even if you create the consignment return the goods are not come to direct to your plant. you are not invoicing the customer. here the owner ship is not changing so . It is defined in 4 steps. For that you need to create consignment pick up. pricing. pricing. How to perform a consignment order? In consignment orders you are allowing the stock to sit in your customer location. you are setting relevent for billing. 2. Sales document type: KR Item category: KRN Shedule line category: D0 You will assign delivery document and billing to sales document. In item category.Note that in consignment fillup and consignment pickup there are no invoices since there is no change of ownership for the materials. Sales document: KE Item category: KEN shedule line category: C0 or C1 Here you are invoicing the customer(because he used the goods). relevent for availability check & TOR. Once he informs that he used the stock you will invoice him. NO availability NO TOR. return delivery. Your setting item category relevent for billing.

Say 34 cartons. VBN2 is to change the record. for example customer A buys 34 cartons of Corn Ice-cream. Now in next screen create the record as follows: .you do not need to create billing.Ugameswara Issue free goods to selected Customers Client wants to issue free goods to selected customers after the said customer buys a specified quantity of a good during the festive season starting 02 December to mid January.Run trans. How do I set it up? 1. delivery. (that is if you want exclusive) . Rao *-. Assign retrun delivery to sales document type. Stock will increase. customer # and execute. Kris J If you want to give free goods to some of the customers than .Sales org. The system will automatically propose the free goods item at no additional charge.First select the exclusive button and verify that you are in exclusive view. Sorry for the error. If not adjust the calculation parameters in the master record screen It should be transaction VBN1. Now you check your plant stock. distribution channel. VBN1 creates it. Try higher order qtys and see if the free goods qty are scaling up. MRP. this should then reflect as cost in our accounts. we offer him 12 free corns. Sales document: KA Item category: KAN schedule line category: F0 & F1 Your setting item category relevent for returns. VBN2 to first create master record for free goods as follows: Enter following information in selection screen: . any shedule line category relevent for 632 movement type.Material#. the rest of the system is already up and running and should not be inconvinienced. availability check. Min qty . (check in what units you want to manage) From: 34 cartons unit of measure: Free goods: 12 Pcs Unit of measure: Pcs Calcualtion type: 1 or try the other options Deliver control: Blank or any of the other options suitable to you. Now run VA01 for 34 cartons and press enter. Now save and exit.Free goods type: NA00 .

create a condition table (free goods) say 555 only for customer group 4. Create free goods determination with transaction code /nvbn1 for FREE with Key Csuomer Group 99 for exclusive Give customer Group say 99 and from 34 to 34 free 12 Supressing Fields in Sale Order To make optional / mandatory you can use in IMG . If a field has no field name. maintain pricing procedure say ZFREE with condition type FREE Now assign: 7. the screen fields are allocated to so-called modification groups 1 . Below is the sample code IF SCREEN-NAME = 'VBKD-ABSSC'. it cannot be allocated to a group. . For this we use userexit FORM USEREXIT_FIELD_MODIFICATION in MV45AFZZ. you must make them in this user exit.4 and can be edited together during a modification in ABAP. add a feild catalog for CUSTOMER GROUP 3. create a sequence say FREE with condition table 555 5.1. With Compliments by: Taner Yuksel Actually suppressing fielding sales orders userwise is quite easy. create a condition type say FREE with 6. We are doing it in our company. Active Free goods Determination or Assign with your sales organisation this procedure ZFREE 8. If you require changes to be made. To do this.S&D-> Basic > Functions-> Log of incomplete Procedures => select the fields > from the tables and the system will check for them (OVA2/VUA2) To make a filed entry enabled or grey (non-entry allowed): User exits in the program MV45AFZZ-USEREXIT_FIELD_MODIFICATION This user exit can be used to modify the attributes of the screen fields. This FORM routine is called up by the module FELDAUSWAHL. create a customer group say 99 for FREE GOODS In Free Goods Menu: 2. The usage of the field groups (modification group 1-4) is as follows: Modification group 1: Automatic modification with transaction MFAW Modification group 2: It contains 'LOO' for step loop fields Modification group 3: For modifications which depend on check tables or on other fixed information Modification group 4: is not used The FORM routine is called up for every field of a screen.

You need to create a class (You might have to create a new class type) which incorporates the characteristic. First Create the Characteristic Using Ct04 and then using Cl02 create the Class including this characteristic. For this you need to maintain a Classes d for you Material. and there assign the corresponding fields that are to be accessed via this userexit.AUTHORITY-CHECK OBJECT 'ZMV45AFZZ' ID 'SCRFNAME' FIELD SCREENNAME. Resistance for Electric Items. Item proposal is the list of materials and order quantities that can be copied into the sales order from the customer master data. A1) Normaly we use batch determination at delivery level. SCREEN-INPUT = 1. the whole process. ENDIF. because at the time of order material may or may not be created. Then Create the Batch Determination Record using VCH1. Some Light on Batch Determination On batch determination. IF sy-subrc = 0. Ex: Purity for Medicines.Give the value of the characteristics in this batch. . SCREEN-INPUT = 0. Strategy Types and assignment to sales docs etc). Then Create a Batch for the particular plant and Stor Loc using MSC1N. Depending on the Manufacturing process you can define the characteristics for your material. else. You place the authority check object in authorization profile in the role of the users. how it is determined automatically in the order. Then in your material master Classification View Enter this class. endif. Difference between Item Proposal and Material Determination What is the difference between the item proposal and material determination product proposal? Item proposal and product proposal are the same. Then go to SPRO ->Logistics General ->Batch Management and maintain the Condition Technique (Procedure. who should have access to the field (in this case it is VBKD-ABSSC).for this material should be configured with batch and batch determination should be checked in sales views of material. A2) Batch Determination during order Creation.

 Then go to CU41 Configuration profile select the material and enter the description click on the class assignment ie assign Zbikclass. Here we get a number. Material determination is triggered by the material entered in the line item of the sales order. Material determination is useful when old product is becoming obsolete or a new product is released by the company at specific date. "An item proposal is a list of materials and order quantities that can be copied into the sales order.KMAT type with Item category (002)  Create Charateristics in CT04 . Select Edit & propose items.ZBikeclass ( Type 300) in characteristics tab page." Steps for SD Variant Configuration Some light on Variant Configuration in Detail. SAP Tips by: Prashanth Harish Item Proposal or Product proposal: "Item proposal is same as product proposal & SAP uses the two terms interchangeably." Material determination: "Material determination uses the condition technique to swap one material for another when certain conditions apply.We use VA51 to create the item proposal.ZPrice.This number is then linked to the customer master data in the sales view. 3) Enter the item proposal on the sales area data (sales tab) of the customer master record. Use transaction [VB11] to create a material determination condition record. Blue etc  Create another characteristics in CT04 . where in values mention the Color of the bile like Red. Items can also be selected from a list and copied into a sales order. And [OV12] for configuration of material determination. Material determination is very closely related to item proposal /product proposal and is used to swap one material for another in the sales order using the condition technique.Zbike. I have not seen Material determination procedures used in the projects I have worked. The procedure is as follows:  Create a Material . where directly go the additional data tab and maintain the table SDCOM and field VKOND (ABAP Dictionary it will ask for)  Assign these two characteristics to a Class in CL01 ." 1) Use transaction [VOV8] to configure the document type ("MS" for product proposal). . 2) Use transaction [VA51] to create a proposal. 4) In [VA01] to create a sales order. This is very commonly used.

$self.The same can be reached through in IMG as : Sales & Distribution-->Sales->Sales Document Header-->Define Number Ranges for Sales Documents.Select Procedure enter in front of 10 write .What is dependency and what are the types? . In Standard SAP the Transaction code for Maintaiing Number ranges externally is VN01.assignments and assign relationship ( by default it will come just save)  Now go to VK11 .What is a variant table? . however it can be maintained externally also if you customize it accordingly.Enter VA00 (Condition)(For Std RVA001 Pricing Procedure) enter variant Red and Blue give the rates accordingly and create the sales order.$self. monitor.Other Dependencies .Balaji Number Ranges In Sales Order This is regarding number ranges defining and assigning tips which you can follow as below: Whenever there is a new Sales Org being created. keyboard.go to extras . Possible questions you can expect are: .What is configuration profile? . you will be required to maintain Number Ranges for Sales Documents which are allowed for your New Sales Area. Number Ranges can be maintained Internally by the system.assignments and assign relationship ( by default it will come just save)  Now select Blue.ZPrice='Red' and save  Now go back go to extras .Select Procedure enter in front 10 write . monitor can be 15" or 17" etc.What is value? .select Red. . Based on the values selected the variant pricing will happen using the condition type VA00.And the transaction codes for the above.ZPrice='Blue' and save  Now go back go to extras . Defining . mouse etc). These components are called as characteristics in variant config. *-.What is characteristic? .What is class? . Again this will be having values like processor can be either P4 or P3.Other Dependencies .Editor .Shaik Zaheeruddin Tell me about variant configaration? What are the type of questions we can expect in that? Variant configuration is used where you have a configurable material like computer (made up of components like processor.Other Dependencies .go to extras .What is variant configuration? .Other Dependencies . *-.enter Zbike -go to values. Now go back to CT04 .

The Assigning Part is done as follows: The Two digit Alpha Numeric Key is maintained or Assigned to the respective Sales Document type in V0V8."Number range External Assignment" Besides this: If a new Shipping Point is created then Delivery Number ranges are required to be maintained.. the system will throw a message that Interval already already exists. Tips by : Vivek Sahni What is Debit note and Credit note What is Debit note and Credit note? What is the purpose? How we create? 1. If a new Plant is created then Billing Number Ranges are required to be maintained. A debit memo is a transaction that reduces Amounts Payable to a vendor because.M2. Obviously. Here . BB..Here you provide the system a specific Number range as follows: Number range Key +Start Number range+ End Number Range+Current Number For Example: If you want to propose the following Number Range *1 9000076000 9000076999 0 The Current Number field will be kept zero as you are proposing new number range and no sales documents have been created on it . For example: !1. A transaction that reduces Amounts Receivable from a customer is a credit memo. you send damaged goods back to your vendor. If you propose a key that is there in the system or if the Number Range (Start and End Series) is there in the system already.. All the symbols can be used along with numbers from 0 to 9 and Alphabets from A to Z and in any order. and double click on it to display it configuration. ^A... The customer could return damaged goods. Here you put the Two Digit Number key in the Field.. Similarly.. Assigning . . So choose a key that is unique.Z*. you should ensure that it should not be there in the system as existing. This can also be reached in IMG by: Sales & Distribution-->Sales-->Sales Document Header-->Define Sales Document Types Locate the particular Sales Doc Type.. by making this . and which is not there in the system.. while proposing your key.In Assigning. *1 is a Unique Two digit Alphanumeric Key. For eg. you are assigning a Key to a Number Range Series. you assign the particular Sales Document to the Number Range you have already proposed as above.

If the credit memo is specifically related to a particular open invoice item. the assignment is no longer valid and the system will not process it. The system uses the credit memo request to create a credit memo. – With reference to an invoice Here you enter which invoice the complaint refers to. and payments. Credit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a credit memo for a customer. Debit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a debit memo for a customer. for example. or distribute the items of one credit memo request to several billing documents. You can create the debit or credit memo requests in the following ways: – Without reference to an order – With reference to an existing order Here you enter which order the complaint refers to. If the price calculated for the customer is too high.2. calculated with the wrong scaled prices. It is like a standard order. For credit memos. you specify the value or quantity that should be in the credit or debit memo . there is a 1:1 relationship between the credit memo request and the credit memo item posted in Financial Accounting (FI). for example. 3. because the wrong scale prices were used or a discount was forgotten. The system uses the debit memo request to create a debit memo. If the prices calculated for the customer were too low. Then you can apply a multilevel dunning program. creating a credit or debit memo request enables you to create credit or debit memos based on a complaint. If it is not possible to completely offset the credit memo against an invoice. As soon as you bill the credit memo request together with other sales orders. The credit memo request is blocked for further processing so that it can be checked. you have the following assignment options: . If the request is approved. When it has been approved. you can remove the block. As mentioned above. you can remove the block. If you use both Financial Accounting (FI) and Sales and Distribution (SD). The debit memo request can be blocked so that it can be checked. you can post a debit memo to the vendor. who is to reimburse the amount. the payment programme processes them automatically. the payment program automatically attempts to offset the credit memo against the open item. For this first create a sales document with the order type for a credit or debit memo request.Assignment to a single invoice .Assignment of a partial amount to an invoice . 4. you can create a credit memo request. You can use credit memos in Sales and Distribution (SD) for assigning credit memo requests to the open invoices and in Financial Accounting (FI) for assigning credit memos and payments to the open invoices and carry out clearing with them. you can create a debit memo request. credit memo requests. In all cases.Assignment to several invoices When you post credit memos.

the assignment is no longer valid and the system will not process it. you can post a debit memo to the vendor. The request for a credit or debit memo can then be approved or rejected. If the prices calculated for the customer were too low. If the request is approved. A transaction that reduces Amounts Receivable from a customer is a credit memo. Then you can apply a multilevel dunning program. for example. there is a 1:1 relationship between the credit memo request and the credit memo item posted in Financial Accounting (FI). the payment program automatically attempts to offset the credit memo against the open item. credit memo requests. you have the following assignment options:  Assignment to a single invoice  Assignment of a partial amount to an invoice  Assignment to several invoices When you post credit memos. by another department. This request can later be reviewed along with similar ones.5. for example. you send damaged goods back to your vendor. and payments. calculated with the wrong scaled prices. 2. The system uses the credit memo request to create a credit memo. For credit memos. For eg. As soon as you bill the credit memo request together with other sales orders. As mentioned above. For this first create a sales document with . 4. Credit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a credit memo for a customer. you can remove the block. the payment programmed processes them automatically. you can create a credit memo request. . If it is not possible to completely offset the credit memo against an invoice. 3. creating a credit or debit memo request enables you to create credit or debit memos based on a complaint. The customer could return damaged goods. Debit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a debit memo for a customer. It is like a standard order. because the wrong scale prices were used or a discount was forgotten. you can create a debit memo request. you can remove the block. or distribute the items of one credit memo request to several billing documents. If you use both Financial Accounting (FI) and Sales and Distribution (SD). You can block the credit or debit memo request from being billed in Customizing. If the price calculated for the customer is too high. who is to reimburse the amount. Go to Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales document header -> Define sales document type and select the billing block field in the billing section. A debit memo is a transaction that reduces Amounts Payable to a vendor because. The credit memo request is blocked for further processing so that it can be checked. When it has been approved. Explain What Is Credit and Debit Memo 1. You can use credit memos in Sales and Distribution (SD) for assigning credit memo requests to the open invoices and in Financial Accounting (FI) for assigning credit memos and payments to the open invoices and carry out clearing with them. The system uses the debit memo request to create a debit memo.if necessary. The debit memo request can be blocked so that it can be checked. If the credit memo is specifically related to a particular open invoice item.

You can block the credit or debit memo request from being billed in Customizing.if necessary. In all cases. Plant to plant transfer and even transferring raw material to Third party contractors (Job Work). Internal customer should be assigned to the ordering plant ( MM -> Purchasing -> Purchase Order -> Setup stock transport order -> assign the internal customer to the ordering plant and assign the Sales area of the internal customer. The Process is you create a STO do delivery against the STO and create a Billing Document against the STO. The request for a credit or debit memo can then be approved or rejected. It is used for inter company transfer of goods. Use the same Invoice Script/smartform for Credit/debit memo's INVOICE Output type : RD00 ScriptForm Name : RVINVOICE01 Driver Program Name : RVADIN01 smartform name : LB_BIL_INVOICE Smartform Driver Pgm: RLB_INVOICE Explain STO. Tcode : OMGN .the order type for a credit or debit memo request. This request can later be reviewed along with similar ones. How to configure the inter-company Stock Transport Order? . 5. you specify the value or quantity that should be in the credit or debit memo.Prassee Material should exist in both the plants (Delivering & Ordering). STO is Stock Transport order. by another department. . Go to Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales document header -> Define sales document type and select the billing block field in the billing section. You can create the debit or credit memo requests in the following ways:  Without reference to an order  With reference to an existing order Here you enter which order the complaint refers to.  With reference to an invoice Here you enter which invoice the complaint refers to.

However. Billing (Intercompany pricing conditions should be set).Assign its Sales area to the delivering plant Assign the document type and Delivery type NB and NLCC Assign the Supplying plant --> Receiving Plant --> NB Take the delivering plant and assign the sales area. an intercompany sales occurs when the selling organization belongs to a different company code than the delivering plant. Suppose there are two company codes namely 1000 and 2000. A sales order is created indicating delivering plant of company code 1000. Start the log display and see the delivery document number by the documents button Goto VL02N --> do picking and PGI --> Then do the MIGO with respect to the delivery document. Explain the Inter Company Sales Process. The transaction path for accessing intercompany sales billing is: IMG >> Sales and distribution >> Billing >> Intercompany billing Let us take an example to understand intercompany sales better. The sales organization then invoices the customer for the materials purchased. Vendor master has to be created and assaign the supply source ( Delivering Plant). the goods may be manufactured by a delivering plant belonging the company code 1000. A customer may place an order for goods in sales organization belonging to company code 3000. Create a puchase order ME21N ---> Save Delivery VL10 G ---> Calculation rule (appropriate) --> Assaign the purchase order number here and execute. In SAP sales & distribution module. SAP R/3 automatically creates an intercompany . Select the Delivery creation line and do the back ground process.

observe bill type-F2.Now create VA01. Below is the inter-company check list: Check all your settings once again for creating inter-company billing: .) . they request for their sister concern company to deliver these ordered goods to the customer directly. but you'll find IV01-.type in V/06.company sales process. However. .Maintain the intercomapny billing type (IV) in ur sales doc type (OR). . . . @ item level as well as @ header level. But in case the stock is transferred between different company codes..Create Billing VF01 (with ref to DEL again)--observe the bill type-IV. you won't find any PI01 Ctype. As a rule of thumb. that’s the reason you enter delivering plant while creating sales order. it has the ref Ctype as "PI01" .billing document at the same time as the customer’s billing document is created. . and save. after delivery they will receive intercompany invoice from the delivering company code. Normal Sales Order Cycle Configuration What are those initial sales order config? By: Anuradha . if you observe the details of IV01 C. . if the stock be transferred within the same company code.R (Receiving) become the customer of Plant-D.Create Billing VF01 (with ref to DEL)--.Assign this customer number to Plant -R's details & its selling sales area.Maintain relevant copy controls between documents.Now Plant . a transfer of value occurs and is an intercompany sale.Material should exist in both plants. . no PO will raise. there is no need for an intercompany transaction. --In inter. when dealing with different company codes. While creating sales order. So create a dummy customer in Plant-D's company code and sales area. if the end user knows there is no stock on their plant. This intercompany invoice is sent from the delivering plant to the selling sales organization. .Create Delivery VL01n. . in delivering plant -enter Plant-D. through which the condition record of PI01 is shared to IV01 also. .Determine pricing procedure for Standard (RVAA01) as well as Intercompany (ICAA01) (Note: Dummy customer's CPP.Assign the Plant-D to selling sales org+ dbt channel. one may find a need to transfer stock between two different company codes.Stock will be maintained in D-Plant (Delivering).VK11 (Note: In ICAA01. enter the required fields. with ref to SO.Maintain the condition records for Condition type PI01. IV doc's DPP along with Delivering plant's sales area) .

Maintain Copying Control For Billing Documents: Maintain relevant copy controls such as Sales Order to Billing. Assign Sales Area To Sales Document Types: A. 2. 2. Incase if required to create new. B. If possible use standard sales order. Assign Schedule Line Categories: If possible. copy as from standard & maintain New. Define Schedule Line Categories: If possible use Standard Schedule Lines. copy as from standard & maintain New. 3. Define Item Categories: If possible use Standard Item Category. . Sales Document Item: 1. Assign sales order types permitted for sales areas: Assign only required Sales Order Types to required Sales Area. such as Inquiry. copy as from standard & maintain New. Define Number Ranges For Sales Documents: Maintain number range with discussion with core team. Combine sales organizations / Combine distribution channels / Combine divisions: Ensure to maintain these. copy as from standard & maintain New. Sales Document Type: The sales document types represent the different business transactions. Formula for deriving Schedule Line: Item Category + MRP Type / No MRP Type. Define Delivery Types: If possible use Standard Delivery Type. Define Number Range For Billing Documents: Ensure to maintain number range. use standard. To create new sales order type. Incase if required to create new. Incase if required to create new. The configuration differs from scenario to scenario & requirement of the client. This will minimize selection of Sales Order Type as per sales area. Step 2: IMG > Logistic Execution > Shipping > Deliveries > 1. copy as from standard & maintain New. use standard. etc. Step 3: IMG > Sales and Distribution > Billing > 1. 3. 3. 2. Incase if required to create new. Deliver to Billing. Sales Order. Define Number Ranges for Deliveries: Ensure to maintain number range. always copy as with reference to similar sales order.Normal Sales Order Cycle:Step 1: Sales Document Type IMG > Sales and Distribution > Sales > Sales Documents > Sales Document Header: 1. Assign Item Categories: If possible. 2. etc. else Sales Order creation will give error. Formula for deriving item category: Sales Document Type + Item Category Group + Usage + Higher Level Item Category = Item Category Schedule Line: 1. Define Billing Types: If possible use Standard Billing Type. Incase if required to create new. 2. Quotation. Define Item Categories for Deliveries: If possible use Standard Item Categories for Delivery Type.

If you want the system to check the stock at a specific storage location.Default Storage Location In Sales Order Where to maintain settings if we want to make storage location appear by default at the time of creating the sales order? There is No storage location determination at Sales order level. then you have to use user EXIT. the system determines the storage location when it creates the outbound delivery and copies it into the delivery item. If required to give manually.to default in item. What is an open sales order? .. the storage location has to be entered manually at item level or you have to go for development so that it will be defaulted under the specific conditions specified. You cannot configure storage location into sales order: you need to use user exit MV45AFZB USEREXIT_SOURCE_DETERMIN or You can use userexit_save_document Userexit_save_document_prepare or The relevant forms to be used are: USEREXIT_MOVE_FIELD_TO_VBAK -.. RETA. User exit: MV45AFZZ --Standard SAP can't determine storage location at sales order level.to default in Header. But at deliver it'll determine automatic. You have to create a Z-table and maintain the table with data under which that specific storage location has to be determined. If sales order level by default require. Storage location will be determined at Delivery level only. The storage location entered in the order item is copied into the outbound delivery. This functionality is not available in the standard SAP. USEREXIT_MOVE_FIELD_TO_VBAP -. Only we can enter manually. Do the proper settings at Delivery level: SPRO --> LOGISTICS EXECUTION --> SHIPPING --> PICKING --> DETERMINE PICKING LOCATION --> Define Rules for Picking Location Determination. If no storage location for picking is specified in the order item. The system determines the picking location based on a MALA. Storage loction determination in Sales order is only possible via a user exit. System does not determine storage location at sales order level. MARA rule defined in the delivery type. A userexit has to be used so that it will default the appropriate storage location after checking the table. User has to indicate it at time of creating sales order.

. Payments posting affects the status of the accounting document. the status of billing becomes "complete" as well. you look at table BSEG. 3. Open Sales order : I will explain taking an example. not open order. Now select the line item and assign Reason for Rejection which you will find on the right top side. the status of the delivery becomes "complete". suppose there is an order for 100 qty and against this order. then its status will be open . once payment is posted with reference to this accounting document. an accounting document is created and the status is "not cleared". that sales order will be considered as complete order. the status remains at "being processed". (double click on item and at item level chk the status) or check in transaction VA05 all the open orders. Sales order : once delivery has been created. 2. input the sale order and execute. Outbound delivery : when items are picked and posted for goods issue. Billing document : when billing document is created and saved. hence. Go to VA02. 4. it is partially delivered.e. How can we know using data in tables whether a sales order is open or not? Check in Transaction VA05 and in table the status filed will tell you the status of open order. the status of the order changes from "open" to "completed". the status becomes "cleared". Table VBAP / VBAK / VBUK (header) and VBUP (item) Which table is updated when customer pays against an invoice? Check table VBAK / VBAP / VBRK / VBRP and VBFA you can chk the document flow. because it is not fully delivered. here you can see list of all Sales order open for any particular sales area. You can check the open order status in VA02 in status tab. In SAP SD. and posted to accounting.An open sales order is where the order has not been delivered (physical goods). Or you can check one by one order & reject the pending item. How to close any open sales order? Go to transaction VA05. Delivery will be open against which billing is not happened. i. the status becomes complete only when billing is done. You can either do mass maintenance to close all the open order by giving rejection reason. they are: 1. In order. Can you tell if a sales order can be considered open if delivery has happened but payment has not been done yet? Yes. the document flow will summarize the status of each document. only 50 are being delivered till its delivery date .

VAU? If some value is set for this parameter . you can change the sold to party in sale order either in creation mode (VA01) or in change mode (VA02). purchase requisition is created automatically and purchase order is created with reference to the purchase requisition. or Can you also check in your SU3 Parameters whether there is any entry with Parameter ID . --- Change sold to party in sales order We have the below requirement of changing sold to party after creation of sales order: Once sales order is created. then you can delete the sales order from the tcode VA02 . How to disable this? This is due to activation of userexit V45A0002. you cannot change the sold to party bocz. but before saving the sales order document we changed the customer and new customer is '21'. After creation of purchase order.If you have not delivered any quantity. You can also check if there is any Transaction Variant associated with your Transaction in SHD0 through which the default sold-to-party can come. These will get redetermine -->Tax . --- Effect of sold to party in sales order What is the effect of sold to party in sales order? Suppose we are creating the sales order with customer '11' and material 'abc'. sold to party option in sales order is display only. How to make it changeable? As long as you have not created subsequent document like delivery or invoice.Enter your doc no. the respective stock is getting reserved for that sales order. Take the help from ABAPer to find the project which is assigned to the userexit and deactivate the same. it will be copied by default in SOLD-TO-PARTY during creation of the Sales Document (VA01) You can remove this ID or clear the Value. But once you created the subsequent document.in the menu bar go to sales document-then DELETE. We wanted to change the sold to party option. So when Goods receipt is done. the said field will become uneditable. system giving default sold to party. Sold To Party In Sales Order Screen After entering sales order (va01) screen. You need to deactivate this. so after this change which is redetermined in the sales order.

In general. but at sales order you can change the profit center otherwise check 0KEM It seems as though we have a FI setup in our system through which the Profit Center on the Sales Order is NOT defaulted from the Material master. After doing F2 and when you save a the Invoice i. If different SP. In material master. may have different SH.e. then Route may be different. Shipping condition may vary. could you please provide me the steps where I could look that up? . If you assign there automatically it will trigger in the sales order. Incoterm & Credit limit may be different.. So accordingly those data will change. Plant may be different. but is showing up another value. then Price may vary. so Tax may change. Answer: Sales order takes profit center from material master view Sales: Plant/General data. then the new SP (21) may be valid for some other Sales Area.F2 for that material this material value has to trigger in the profit center in FI properly. Profit center is assigned in (material master record) MMR in sales orgn 2 view. so Payment Term. If the Sold to party is changed from 11 to 21. and as Tax is mostly Plant dependent.-->Price -->Frieght -->Payment terms -->Shipping conditions -->Partner (Ship to party.PY &BP. Question: In sales order we have profit center tab in line item --> account assignment. once you do OR. -->Route. bill to party and Payer). so those data will be changed/redetermined accordingly. I was created profit center PBB2K for part A but it is showing different profit center when sales order created. As different SH may be different. If SP is different PY may be different. automatically an accounting document gets generated along with a profit center document also gets generated if you have assigned profit center to your MMR. This profit center is used in MMR because. In the item data -> account assignment tab . So those data may change. the material master profit center defaults to profit center. Advise why different profit center show in sales order? Check 0KEM for any sales order substitution for profit center. From where does this profit center comes here? The source I mean.LF. F2.

You can define your own here. Goto tcode SHD0. It is in substitution. give t code as VA01. So without Profit Center Entry Sales Order will be incomplete.code OVA2 copy the procedure you are now working with and add the field vbapPrctr. How can I make the Field Profit Center in the line item level of the sales order to mandatory? You can do this by transaction variant. You will see that you can substitute the profit center in the sales order using substitution. or Simple.1234 DstCh: Division: Customer Statistic Group: + Statistics group for sales document type: 1 and Sales Org: DstCh: Division: . or Please include the Field Profit Center (PRCTR) in incompletion Procedure of Sales Order Item. Make a transaction variant and make the fields mandatory. separately in two rows: Sales Org: say. In VUP2 you can assign your new procedure to your item category. Goto T. Go to transaction GGB1 and see under the node profit center accounting. Check Whether The Entries Is Maintain in LIS Update or Not Path: SPRO --> IMG --> Logistics-General -->Logistics Information System --> Logistics Data Warehouse --> Updating --> Updating Control --> Settings: Sales --> Update Group --> Assign Update Group at Header Level Maintain following data.What configuration is it from the FI side that is preventing the standard material PC to be over ridden? Please check OKB9.

you will maintain Settings for LIS-Update. separately in two rows: Sales Org: DstCh: Division: Customer Statistic Group: + Material Statistic Group: 1 Statistics group for sales document type: 1 Statistics group for the item category: 1 and Sales Org: DstCh: Division: Customer Statistic Group: + Material Statistic Group: 1 Statistics group for sales document type: 2 Statistics group for the item category: 2 Note: Once. 3PL Purchase Order Link To Sales Order For third party order. This will trigger a PR. either you can create the material master with item category group as BANS. based on the PR a PO will be generated.Customer Statistic Group: + Statistics group for sales document type: 2 SPRO --> IMG --> Logistics-General -->Logistics Information System --> Logistics Data Warehouse --> Updating --> Updating Control --> Settings: Sales --> Update Group --> Assign Update Group at Item Level Maintain following data. Defining Item Category Group IMG -> Sales and Distribution -> Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales Document Item -> Define Item category groups Defining Item Category -> Sales and Distribution -> Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales Document Item -> Define Item Categories Item category TAS Description 3rd party with SN CM Item type Blank Completion rule Blank Special stock Blank Relevant for billing B Billing plan type Blank Billing block Blank . so the system will automatically pick TAS in the sales order for the material or you can change the item category manually to TAS in the order. it will update onwards transactions and will not update for already done transactions.

. (Basic View 1&2. 3. batch determ. Blank Config. start date Blank Business data item X Sched. Sales Views. On the screen Create Material (Initial Screen) enter the material number if External. Choose Select View(s). 2. line allowed X Item relev. Creating SD Pricing Conditions for material VK11 . Purchasing views and accounting views). 28 PartnerDetermProced T TextDetermProcedure 01 Item cat.Pricing X Statistical value Blank Revenue recognition Blank Delimit. Use material group BANS in the item material group field. Enter the relevant data and save the material. Blank Rounding permitted Blank Order qty = 1 Blank Incomplete proced.relevant X Credit active X Determine cost X Aut. variant action Blank ATP material variant Blank Structure scope Blank Application Blank Value contract material Blank Contract release ctrl Blank Repair procedure Blank Billing form Blank DIP profile Blank Assigning Item Category IMG -> Sales and Distribution -> Sales -> Sales Documents -> Sales Document Item -> Assign Item categories Creating Material MM01 1. for delivery Blank Returns Blank Weight/Vol. group N Status profile Blank Create PO autom. status group 1 Screen seq. strategy Blank Mat.

imp group/item category/ procedure. To get the default values for foreign trade data go to 1. 2. Solution : This will resolve the issue for current Invoice./country of origin and region of origin at material master HINT: Go to VTFL. Maintain blank field there and save.export data". IMG --> Sales and Distribution --> Foreign Trade/Customs --> Basic data for foreign trade --> Define Procedures and Default Value --> Define procedure default In this step maintain assignments with the combination of country/sales org/dist channel/division/exp. There again click on "Incompleteness analysis" which will be below to "Head. Trouble Shooting and Problem Solving : Go to VF02.Foreign Trade/Customs". select your billing type and delivery type and click on blue magnifying lens on top left so that it will take you to a screen where most probably. you can check the log as "Document complete". Now system will not throw incomplete error message. Apart from the above we need to maintain Comm. click on "Goto -. . Material To Be Added or Excluded To a Customer How to setup material exclusion for customer during sales order creation? If you want specific material to be added or excluded to a customer. you would be maintaining "B" for "Determ. Once you gave all the data and save./imp. From top menu bar.text" tab so that it will take you to the areas where you need to fill in the required datas.Header -. code no. input the billing document and execute. maintain default values. you can do it in "Listing and Exclusion". IMG --> Sales and Distribution --> Foreign Trade/Customs --> Basic data for foreign trade --> Define Business Transaction Types And Default Value --> Define Default Business Type (SD) In this step maintain assignments for country/sales org/dist channel / item category / and transaction type combination. but if the same error is occurring for every Invoice.Creating Vendor Master XK01 What is the Foreign trade data required in SO for doing Exports I am doing export sale but while creating billing document system give error that "Missing export data" hence accounting document has not created.

it may be helpful. Maintaining records for material Exclusion: Logistics Sales and distribution Master data Products Listing/Exclusion VB01 Create Specify the condition type for exclusion Select the required key combination Enter the required materials in exclusion and save it. Maintaining condition technique for listing and exclusion: SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Listing/Exclusion Maintain condition tables for listing/exclusion Maintain access sequence for listing/exclusion Maintain listing/exclusion types Go to new entries and define condition types one each for listing. Material Exclusion: Whatever the materials that are placed in exclusion for a customer he cannot access those materials. Material listing and exclusion: Material listing: Whatever the materials that are placed in the listing for a customer he can access to those materials only.Here is a small note on listing and exclusion. Maintaining records for material listing: Logistics Sales and distribution Master data Products Listing/Exclusion VB01 Create Specify the condition type for listing Select the required key combination Enter the required materials in listing and save it. exclusion Procedure for maintaining listing/exclusion .

If is.it will be appear in MD04. Then the line item from MD04 will be deleted. do the following: 1. the orders on the same day are summarized. Go to the sales order. Listing type A001 2.Define the procedure one each for listing and exclusion Activate listing/exclusion by sales document type Select the required sales document type and assign the procedure for listing and exclusion Note: 1. Your understanding is perfectly right. Once PGI is done against to this delivery document. then delivery number will appear. Exclusion type B001 3. but the delivery number is not shown in MD04. The sales order appears in MD04 with correct date and quantity. you can run the prog: SDRQCR21 It makes sense as well that for 01. SO number will not appear. Availability Check might be maintained as "01" . However MD04 does not show the sales order number. To check the Availability Check rules for existing sales order (VBBE). To recovery / delete the inconsistent entries. Fyi: Once sales order is created . then the sales order number will not appear in MD04 list. In MD04. Procedure for listing A00001 4.Individual requirement. Select particular line item. Why the numbers that are saved in SD not shown in MD04? Solution: Check in Material Master . So you can’t see the SO number in this case. This is the reason. it could consist all the SO numbers on that day.Daily requirement. Procedure for exclusion B00001 Sales Order Number Blank In MD04 I have a sales order which is complete in all respects.MRP3 View. why you can't see the SO number in MD04 for Materials which has AC:01. This delivery is seen in MD04 with correct date and quantity. SO number will appear for 02. . Delivery is successfully PGI'ed subsequently. once delivery is created wrt: SO ( w/o PGI). (number is blank) Delivery can be created from this sales order.line appears as summarized requirement for the whole day. 2.

then ideally table VBBE should have been updated for that sales order PS: For existing sales order that were already created. so you might want to look there what is configured for that text. New sales order or new item line in the same sales order with the materials will work after MM . If your availability check option is 01. You shall see that on top left section. it indicates Individual Requirement. it means table VBBS shall be updated with Daily ( total records / requirements ) If your availability check option is 02. Check the Text in the material master. Check the text in material master.MRP View 3 .3. Path is spro -> sales and distribution -> basic function -> Text control -> Define and . Path vd52 -> Goto . B etc ) Your focus should be on Availability Check. Path Tcode xd02 -> Click on Extra ( on menu ) -> Texts. Check customer material info record . You shall get the availability screen.>Texts If texts in above master data matching with sales header text than its done through text determination. it will list you where the text is coming from or tell you if it was found anywhere. there are two fields A) Availability Check ( eg 01. it will still shows blank as the system only copied the MRP Settings once. If it is 02. click on SCOPE OF CHECK 6. If nothing was found. 02 etc) B) Checking rule ( A . 3.Availability Check had been changed to "02". it might be a manual text insertion. Path Tcode mm02 -> Sales Texts 2. The automatic lookup is configured in the customizing SD -> Basic functions -> Text -> Sales order -> Header. a default text is being displayed In Header -> Texts. Click on Display availability button at the bottom 4. ON the top . Texts in the sales order can be copied from the material master or customer master. We are not getting from where it’s getting displayed? Answer: First. 5. While creating a Sales Order. Possible lookouts: 1. run the text analysis (protocol symbol right of the display details symbol).

This regenerates the text configuration making sure everything is active. confused. it could be due to the Dummy Text which you need to make used of the program: RVTEXTE What RVTEXTE is and what does it do? I've used this program before when the standard text config seemed OK.assign Text determination Procedure -> check box sales document header -> click on change -> click on text procedure assignment -> check out text procedure assigned to your sales header and check out that procedure. X flag = delete all dummy texts. Please note that the above procedure will not delete any real text for sales orders. Its text Id's and access sequence. Normally during sales document creation the texts get dummy names (= X*) which are later replaced by the correct names (which contain the document number) when the document is saved. These texts (in database table STXH) have a TDNAME = X*. If you have access to OSS notes. 2. RVTEXTE does not delete valid texts from your documents or from the master records. . with flag X in the function Field. but it just wasn't working. RVTEXTE will "clean up" any bogus stuff in the text control if you've done a lot of config and the system is somehow." Please check if in your system you have this latest version. Secondly. It only deletes dummy or phantom text entries that should not be in your documents. This will delete all phantom/dummy text appearing in sales orders. To run the report: 1. When the above text checking are fine. For my purposes. internally. only the phantom texts. Firstly. To delete dummy texts you should run report RVTEXTE. Please see OSS note 413096 for the latest versions. This report is useful and it is always good to run it from time to time. please see note: 574580 Here is some further information on the report RVTEXTE: "If the wrong text determination occurs randomly. G flag = cleanup of text procedures and access sequences in all clients. then most likely that in your system there exists so called "dummy texts". with flag G in the function field. For some (often unknown) reasons these dummy texts are written to the database and then cause problems.

Rebates How to do rebate processing Rebates Processs in SAP is divided into three components 1) Configuring Rebates 2) Setting Up Rebates 3) Managing rebate agreeeements and payments Pre-requsiistes. but distinguish themselves from pricing in applying to transactions over time..Check the following: 1. Enter 1 in field category for rebate specific. Rebates have their wn field catalog and their own condition table naming convention. versus on a transaction basis. Rebate related condition types are identified by codnition class -C.The Sales Organisation must be marked as relevant for rebates. Use create access sequence (AS). Provision for accruals is debited and Sales revenue is credited. it defines how much can be paid out during a partial settlemetn.So you could have two condition table "001" one for pricing and one for rebates. quarterly or anyother specified period. The requirement should be 24 here which implies that the accruals are calculated on the basis of invoice/bill. remove the requiremnt 24.The Billing type must be marked as relevant for rebates. . When rebate credit memo is created Customer account/ is debited and Accrual provision account is credited. please note that when rebates are created without dependent ona material but on customer/material you need to refer to a material for settlement. When you do manual payments. 3. use the condition technique. The big difference between the rebate and the pricing access sequence is that there is no exclsuion flag available for rebate related AS. which could have different key fields. 2. Also. if u want to see reabtes at order time.The payer partner needs toi have the rebate field checked in the customer master on the sales area-billing doc tab.alctyp and altcbv does not allow you to manipulate how a rebate is calculated. This means multiple tables for an access sequence can be aplied at the same time. The other fields. Condition Technique : Rebates. Now payment of rebates: Payments can be maunal or in full settlement. AS after going thru the right path of maintaining access sequence for rebates. After defining and creating condition types for rebated include them in the pricing proceedure. Also. You use partial settlement only when rebate agreement is defined for a full year but the paoyouts are supposed to happen on a monthly. These accurals are based on sales volume and when they are posted billing is created int eh follwoing manner. You need to use the technical names A001 For pricing and KOTe001 for rebates when you use the query type using transaction SE 16.

The rebates are passed on to the customer in the form of Credit notes. R. if at the end of the year the customer DOES achieve the target u offer him say 2/3/4 % whatever is decided.(REQUIREMENT=24) ALSO IN THE PROCEDURE.htm However. The rebates are based on the volume of the business the customer does with you within a specified time. After having done this please proceed to maintain the condition record for the rebates (transaction code-vbo1) Note: if you maintain the requirement coloumn with the requirement as 24 . Condition technique is also used in rebates. Please make sure you open two screens SO THAT YOU CAN COMPARE THE NEW ENTRIES WHAT EVER YOU'RE DEFINING WITH THAT OF THE STANDARDS or . can somebody explain it as I have problem in understanding the link.1 Crore worth of business with u in 1 year. May be I can help you with rebate process. define a rebate agreement type 2.com/sap-sd/rebate-process-with-ref-to-so.With Compliment: Srini I have this same problem found in: http://www. This will help you understand better. The rebate can be given to the customer at one time or in installments also.(IN -IMG) 1.Sreeram Note : I recomend you to study the theory part of why rebate and why not a discount. Assign the agreement type to the condition type group Assign the cond type group to the condition type. SALES ORGANISATION AND FOR THE BILLING DOCUMENT.the rebate will be affected in the billing document and if you dont give the requirement as 24 your rebate will be affected in the sales order. for eg if the customer agrees for Rs. define a condition type and place this condition Type in the pricing procedure. define a condition type group 3.ACCRUAL KEY = ERU YOU ALSO HAVE TO DO THE ACCOUNT DETERMINATION FOR REBATES.IN CUSTOMER MASTER. The rebate process is completed when you have created a credit memo to the customer. The document type for the partial settlement is R3.sap-img. REBATE ACTIVATION. What exactly do you wish to know in Rebates? The total outline of the Rebate process or each and every step in the SAP system? First of all rebates are more or less discounts which are offered to customers. then you activate your rebate porocess. Once you have defined all the 3 and assignment starts. This is broadly the outline of the rebate process.

First you need to create a Rebate agreement. You decided to give a rebate of 3% to a customer whose sales vol is $1000 for a particular SO Then the rebate value is $30. the rebate and accruals are determined and posted in a seperate GL account as a noted item . This is what the link says. I hope this will be of any help to you. 1.first you try with the standard condition type boo1. DELIVERY AND BILLING. create settlement run using credit memo request and then credit memo to settle this amount with the customer.Conditon records which are created like B001 and B002 are linked to the rebate agreeements specifying the rebate rate + the accrual rates. Also it gets copied in the rebate agreement. I am providing some info on rebates which I know..condition records specify the rebate rate and the accrual rates. 2. Consider an example. 4. Rebate Process with Ref. Praveen In a simple way. . then the accounting will be generated saying 27$ paid towards rebate and 3$ is the accrual which you owe to the customer Procedure: Rebate agreement: Transaction code: VB01 When you go to VB01. Create condition record for rebate giving the rebate rate and accrual rate.. GO TO THE CONDITION RECORD IN CHANGE MODE (VB02) AND SETTLE THE ACCOUNT PARTIALLY. choose agreement type 0002 and then in conditions give Material rebate 1 20 20 30 Now create a sales order with a material say M-11 for SOrg 1000 12 00 with QTY 6 Now check VB03 and see rebate agreemtent it will say Accruals 120 and payments 0 since your rebate is not settled still.amount to be settled. AFTER YOU HAVE FINISHED A COMPLETE SALES CYCLE OF CREATION ORDER . Rebate agreemnts is based on agreement types. when the rebate relevent billing doc is generated. boo2 boo3 boo4. to SO If I need to make a rebate for a customer what is the process involved. Now when you make the rebate settlement by doiing the Credit memo and you decide to pay $27. 3.

V/08 3. the validity and check for the status shld be in Open. You can see the rebate condition in the invoice only.this will show u the accrual amount. Credit memo request will b generated copy the no.Final settlement of agreement already carried out .save the doc now.go to create with ref and enter ur Sales order no.accounting document it will show u the accrual as negative. SAP SD Tips by: Priyam How to do a rebate agreement for a specific customers with settings details? 1. Again go to rebate aggreement and check the status it will show you D . then go to rebate agrrement no.Rebate setllement Go to VB02 enter ur sales deal no. For settlement change the status of the rebate to B .. No will be generated choose 003 .release for the settlement.Customer rebates.. 9. Then go to VF01 and enter the credit memo reqst no generated. 8. 7... Create a sales order for that customer and check the rebate agreement. remove the blocks if any and create an invoice (credit memo).Create a Rebate Agreement in VBO1 (It is O = Owl and not zero)... Create a condition by copying a a standard condition like BO03 in V/06 2. and change the agreemetn status to B then enter Shift+F12 and enter the amount to be paid for example u say $80 Then check in rebate payments rebate doc and partial setllemetn since you have not paid in full. You also can have scales in this.. 5. and go to VA02. enter the customer code. Assign this condition in the std pricing procedure with acct key as ERB and accural key as ERU . In both the invoice and the credit memo check the posting . 6.save the doc no and go to VF02 and say release to accounting Now the final settlement will be this way Accruals:120 Accrual reversed:80 Rebate pay:80 Amount payable:40 So the balance 40 is still the accrual This is an example how a rebate will be processed with ref to a SO with an example. Once you have posted the invoices. View the credit memo request Remove the Billing bloock Go to VA01 and put order type G2 . 10. clicl on verficayion and it will show the order details. Also you need to maintain the material for the settlement 4. click on the conditions enter the percentage and accrual amount..

Enter the data necessary to create a condition record (for example: customer and condition rate). credit memo) is relevant for rebate processing Condition types for rebate agreements: BO01 . . . By Lucas Rebate Agreements A rebate is a special discount which is paid retroactively to a customer.Customer hierarchy/Material = % rebate BO06 .Customer/Material = quantity dependent BO03 . customer/rebate group. you can create condition records by choosing Goto -> Conditions to get to the Agreement Overview screen. .To create a pricing scale for a condition record. the system automatically proposes the value you entered as the condition rate. Choose ENTER.Customer = % rebate BO04 .If you do not enter a value for the accrual rate.Customer hierarchy = % rebate BO05 .To display or change details in a condition record.Customer/Material or Customer/Rebate group = % rebate BO02 .sales org is relevant for rebate processing .payer (customer master record) is relevant for rebate processing .billing type (invoice. This discount is based on the customer's sales volume over a specified time period. and so on).Sales vol. You can process rebate agreements when the following prerequisite conditions are met: . select the condition record and choose Details. independent Creating Rebate Agreements Logistics -> Sales and distribution -> Master data Agreements -> Rebate agreement -> Create To create a condition record for a rebate agreement: When creating or changing rebate agreements. .Explain about rebate agreements in sales the process. It is possible to see an overview of condition records that already exist in other rebate agreements and that have the same key combination (customer/material. select the condition record and choose Scales.

(MM01). You can set for each rebate agreement whether it is to be renewed automatically or not. select Validity periods. You need to activate the Rebate process to the Billing document type. 2. By: Micro Irrigation First determine one account group ( Trans code OBD2 ) assign number range for acct group ( Trans code OBAR ). Partner Functions Partner Determination For Sales Doc Explain me how to get partner determination for sales doc header level. Define partner determination procedure: IMG -> SD -> Basic Functions -> Partner Determination -> Setup Partner Determination -> Partner Determination For Sales Doc Header Click on Partner Type Go To New Entries and Define Partner Types Customer KU Vendor LI Contact Person AP Sales Employ SE Select Partner Type KU and Go To Details Icon and Maintain Partner Functions SP Sold To Party . 3. Create Rebate agreement in the transaction VBO1 based on your requirement (whether that material based or customer based). 5. here you need to maintain the accrual key as well as account key. Select Extras -> Rebate calendar -> Reactivate or Remove in the Change Rebate mode. You need to activate the customer for Rebate in the customer master billing tab. 6.To view the list. You need to activate the Rebate process to the sales organisation. Menu path is IMG --> Sales and Distribution --> Billing --> Rebate processing. Notes: These are the prerequisites to be done to process the Rebate. You need to main the Rebate related pricing condition types in your pricing procedure. You need to create one service material as material for settlement to settle the Rebate. 4. 1.

4) Sales Employee(PE) Partner Funcitons-SE Authorized Partner to release the order Contracts are release by raising sales orders. Sh.Forward Agent). Sales. How to customize the Partner Determination Procedure? We can determine partner determination procedure by using the transaction code VOPA.ship to party to release the contracts and this partner functions assigned to partner determination procedure (kab).Sold T party) to release the contracts. Billing. Py. In the business one specifies partner is authorized to enter and to release contracts. A) Partner Types. kb. Flow: Customer master. Delivery. At Header level( sales document) there is a control by which system carries out checks against partner whether he is authorized to release the contract. 3) Contact Person (AP) Partner Functions-CP. For Sales Doc Header The Partner Functions Can Be Determined From Customer Master. 2) Vendor(LI) Partner Functions (FA. Partners to check credit limits: We define partner functions Km-credit Manager.SH Ship To Party BP Bill To Party PY Payer Come Back and Click On Assign Partner Type To Sales Doc Header KU To TA Assign Partner Functions To Account Group SP To ACC GROUP SH BP PY Same. Depending on the partner type every partner fulfill certain mandatory partner functions. In the business different people interacts to make a transaction with the business while making transactions with the business every partner performs certain roles those are called as a partner functions.credit representations both belongs to partner type pe(personal) . Partner type(KU) and Partner Functions( AA. 1) Customer(KU) He performs partner functions like Sp. Document header and items. Aw. Bp. SAP determines relevant partner functions automatically to relevant partner object type.

consists of all the parts that make up the bicycle: the frame. Click on partner function control button under dialog structure Partner Function Name Partner type error sp sold to party ku 07 sh ship to party ku 07 bp bill to party ku 07 py payer ku 07 partner type Pe Km credit manager pe kb credit represent pe 09 09 b) Define partner determination procedure. a) Define Partner functions to sales document header 1) Define partner functions img -> sd -> basic functions -> partner determination -> setup partner determination -> set up partner determination for sales document header 2) Define partner determination procedure. . Sales and Distribution BOM Sales BOM Implementation A bill of material (BOM) describes the different components that together create a product. c) Assign partner functions to partner determination procedure. The individual components are displayed as lower-level items. the saddle. wheels. the system displays the material that describes the whole bill of materials as a main item. Process Flow When you enter the material number of a bill of materials that is relevant for sales order processing. a) Define partner functions Path: Img -> sd -> basic functions -> partner determination -> set up partner determination -> set up partner determination for customer master. for example. A BOM for a bicycle. e) Assign partner functions to account group.Configurations settings: 1) Define Account Group( OBD2) 2) Assign Number range key to Account Group (OBAR) 3) Define partner determination procedure for customer master. For sales document. 3) Assign partner functions to partner determination procedure 4) Partner Determination procedure assignment. and so on. d) Assign partner determination determination procedure to account group.

since our BOMs are all single-level. and delivery processing at the component level. This means that the components only function as text items and are not relevant for delivery. 2 screen in the material master record of the finished product. You could set it to B if BOM are configured multi-level. Also . Once you have entered a bill of material in a sales order. BOM usage '5')? 6. If it doesn't then your BOM isn't working.Component level if the material is not assembled The type of processing used by the system is determined by the item category group that you enter in the material master record for relevant materials. In my experience BOMs work if all maintenance has been done properly.You should assign item categories for BOM header items and sub-items to a specific sales doc.has BOM application SD01 been assigned to it? 3. only the components are relevant for delivery. what's the 'Structure scope' set as? Anything except C may be useful here? We have that set to A. 2 screen in the material master record of the finished product. inventory control. and delivery processing at: . right plant. Has the BOM itself been configured properly (i. The latest delivery date among all the components becomes the delivery date for the entire delivery group. 2. . How to Know that Sales BOM is working or not? I have set up a sales BOM. inventory control. Item categories for main items and sub-items have not been mainteined properly. Are you trying it out on an order created after all BOM maintenance was done? 7. enter LUMF in the Item category group field of the Sales: sales org.Main item level if the material is assembled. In this case. The bom hasn't been defined for the plant used. Main item category .e. or you haven't defined the plant in SO. How do I know or test that is is working or not? Once you enter a material (for whch you have created a BOM thru CS01) in the sales doc another material pops under the main material line item as a sub-item (s). Processing at Component Level If you want the system to carry out pricing. 5. and delivery processing at main item level. enter ERLA in the Item category group field of the Sales: sales org. A number of things to check is: 1.There are two ways to process a bill of materials in Sales. or . Processing at Main Item Level If you want the system to carry out pricing. 4. inventory control. the system runs pricing. The following graphic shows how a bill of material is processed at main item level. During processing the system automatically creates a delivery group. Sales items maintenance .

1) For the BOM to be exploded in the sales document the following customizing setting is required.Sales and distribution . B) If the item category group is LUMF the item category of the BOM item is TAP in the definition of which we have to specify the value A in the field structure scope.Bills of material . just recheck your whole config . The item category group of the BOM items is ‘ERLA/LUMF’ and the item category is ‘NORM’. (L = stock item N = Non-stock item) In the overview screen specify the components which makes the main item and the corresponding quantities and save it. A) If the item category group is ERLA the item category of the BOM is TAQ.Logistics . Note: During sales document processing if we enter the BOM item the system automatically determines corresponding components.Products . Plant: Specify the plant of BOM item. BOM usage: Specify the application in which BOM is maintained (5 for SD).Material BOM CS01 create Specify the data for the following fields. Material: Specify the material for which components are to be maintained. Apart from that. .Those are probably main reasons why BOM shouldn't work. in the definition of which we have to specify the value A (Explode single level BOM) in the structure scope.Master data .the truth is out there somwhere What is bill of material? By: Mike BILL OF MATERIALS We need to maintain Material master records for the BOM Item and for the components also. Creating BOM item: . Alternative BOM: Specifies the sequence of a BOM within a group of BOMs.

A) The item category of BOM item is TAQ. For this following customizing setting is required. . B) The item category of the components is TAN which is relevant for pricing. and price it at header level or sub level. While creating sales document to get the list of alternative BOMs in the definition item category of BOM item we have to check the field “Manual Alternative” 24-07-2007 ITEM CATEGORY DETERMINATION FOR BOM ITEM SD type OR OR OR OR OR OR OR NOTE: ITCaGr ERLA NORM LUMF NORM NORM NORM NORM Usg TAQ TAP TAE TAN HLItCa TAQ TAE TAP TAN TAN TAE TAE DftItCa A – Explode single level BOM item B – Explode multi level BOM item CS01 – Transaction code for creating BOM Item Statistical value ‘x’ or ‘y’ Make TAP relevant for pricing but values for statistical only. A) The item category of the BOM item is TAP which is not relevant for pricing. For this the following customizing setting is required.2) If the item category group is LUMF the system shows price for the components but not for the BOM item. so the components are not priced. which is relevant for pricing. so the components are priced 3) If the item category group is ERLA the system shows price for the BOM item but not for components. B) The item category of components is TAE which is not relevant for pricing. so the BOM item is not Priced. Pricing Customization For Sales BOM What are the steps of customization to pricing for header level or item level then? By: John You can create a sales bom. so the BOM is priced.

and all the assemblies are called as the sub items. -->To create Sales BOM go to the transaction CS01 there you give enter the data Header Material which you have created in the MM01 transaction. just give the Material D and the system will pick up the corresponding assemblies for that material and populate in the order. and C and give their respective quantities.code : VOV4). Then configure the item categories ( T . Before you have to create pricing condition records for Materials A. B and C respectively. Creation of BOM is same. While the Materials A. The difference is that the Material Master D has to be confugured using the item category group ERLA. if the customer asks for a certain combinationa of Material A. This is used when you dont know what quantities of assemblies the customer is going to order and if the price of the assembly keeps varies. -->If you want Header price you create Header Materil with ERLA Itemcategory group. There is another way of configaring BOM which is pricing at header level. For eg. Depending upon your requirement you configure accordingly. The item categories in this case would be Header item : TAQ Sub item TAE. The item category for the header item will be TAP and the item cateory for the items will be TAN. . B. BOM Usage : 5 (Sales and Distribution) then give the Materials A. Here the subitems are relevant for pricing and delivery where as the header item is not relevant for neither pricing nor delivery. B and C are created with standared item category groups NORM only. and subitems are not relevant for neither the pricing nor the delivery. In Summary: -->Befor going to create sales BOM you need to create: Master data for that Header Material and Components in the MM01 transaction. B. But you need to maintain the pricing condition record for the header item. and C. Then create a sales BOM using Tcode CS01 and enter the following details: Material : Material D Plant : Plant in which you created the material.If you want to assemble the products and depending upon the assemblies you want to price. It just acts as a text item. then you create a Material Master record Material D with item category group as LUMF. This type of configaration of BOM is known as pricing at item level. -->If you want pricing at item level you create header material with LUMF Itemcategory group. When processing the sales order. In this cas the Material D is called as the higher level Item . Where the header item is relevant for pricing and delivery.

The company raises PO to the vendor. Assign Item Category TAS to Order type that you are going to use. -->Now you can create sales order with the BOM material Third Party Sales Process Flow for 3rd Party Sales Customize the third party sales in summary: 1. Item category group as "BANS".3rd party sales order Create Sales Order VA01 Order Type Sales org.Seema Dhar SD . there is no delivery process attached in the whole process of Third party sales. Goods issue 9. distr chnl. A sale order is created and when saved a PR is generated at the background 5. 6. div Enter Sold to PO # Material Quantity Enter Save SD .3rd party sales order View the PR that is created with a third party sales order VA01 Order Number . 3. Vendor delivers the goods and raises bill to company. 4.Delivering Plant. therefore. Create Material – Material Type as "Trading Goods". With reference to SO a PO is created (ME21N). The item cat TAS or Schedule line cat CS is not relevant for delivery which is evident from the config and. -->Maintain the Pricing procedure according to that. 10. MM receives the invoice MIRO 7. Create Vendor XK01 2. Billing *-. Goods receipt MIGO 8. BOM Usage as '5' (Sales and Distribution) ***Then proceed with enter system will take you the BOM detail screen here you maintain the details of the components (How many components you need to make a Header material) -->Check the item category determinetion settings in the transaction VOV4.

3rd party sales order Assign the PR to the vendor and create PO ME57 Key in the PR number Toggle the "Assigned Purchase Requisition" Execute Check the box next to the material Assign Automatically button Click on "Assignments" button Click on "Process assignment" The "Process Assignment Create PO" box .Goto Item Overview Item ->Schedule Item SD . go to the menu Sales Document . select "Deliver" .3rd party sales order Create a delivery order VL01N In the order screen . just in case Post Save SD . state the vendor and the Material Check the box Clilck on "Copy" Purchase Order Number (bottom half of the screen) Amount State the baseline date Simulate & Post Invoice Number *Invoice blocked due to date variance SD . enter Drag the PR and drop in the shopping basket Save SD .3rd party sales order Receive Goods MIGO_GR PO Number DN Number Batch tab . click on classification Serial Numbers tab Date of Production Flag Item OK Check.3rd party sales order View the PR that is created ME52N Key in the PR number Save SD .3rd party sales order Create Invoice MIRO Invoice Date Look for the PO .

(3) Menu of path of subsequent Delivery Free of Charge. Ex: If the customer placed for the order for computer then computer stand can be suggested as a combination material.Define determination procedure for cross selling a) Create condition table: Here we define condition table ex: . . (2) While creating individual order I face one error 'Plant not assigned to Controlling Area': How to configure controlling area and menu path.Cross selling . It can be mapped by using cross selling concept that uses condition technique. By using this concept the business can offer combination material for ordered material.IMG . d) Maintain procedure: Go to new entries and define cross selling profile Ex: CS0001 and assign our condition type C001 that we define in the previous step.Go to "picking" tab State the qty and save SD . By : Ahmednsp Cross selling is a concept by which the business can improve the sales.Basic function .SD . When the user raises the sales order and specifies ordered material then system automatically pup-up a box in which system displays suggested material Configuration settings: 1) Define determination procedure for cross selling: Path: .3rd party sales order Create a billing document VF01 Ensure that the delivery document is correct in the Enter Go to edit -> Log Save Cross Selling : How To Configure (1) Cross Selling: How to configure and the menu path details. c) Define condition type: Here we define condition type C001 and assign it to access sequence C001 that we define in previous step.material b) Maintain access sequence: Here we define access sequence ex: C001 and assign condition table ex:011 that we define in previous step.

Assign cross selling profile -. It is blank – dialog box appears in request and after date is released Check cross selling ATP indicator: If you check it .SD . sales area section of sales tab Assign customer procedure for product proposal .cross selling b) Define documents procedure for cross selling: Here we define document cross selling procedure ex: `B". b) Assign cross selling profile: . specify cross selling profile key with description .B Save it and exit Go to VA01.cross selling c) Assign document procedure for cross selling to sales document: Choose sales document type "OR" and assign document cross selling procedure ex: "B" 3) Define and assign cross selling profile: a) Define cross selling profile: Go to new entries. raise the sales order with order material check the effect. .Out bond delivery only if main item has been partially delivered Go to VD02.Go to new entries.Assign the pricing procedure (RVA001) .Logistics .CS0001 Maintain condition record for cross selling (VB41): Path: .Products .Specify document cross selling procedure – B .Specify customer cross selling procedure –B . system carry out ATP check for cross selling product.Cross selling .Specify cross selling pricing procedure (CS0001) .Master data .Specify cross selling dialog box indicator W If it is "A" – dialog box appears only in request. select condition line item Click on alternative material icon and maintain alternative material with cross selling delivery conditions options Blank – Out bond delivery takes place regardless of main item "A" -.VB41 Specify condition type C001 Specify the order material. specify sales area .2) Maintain customer/document procedures for cross selling: a) Define customer procedure for cross selling: Here we define customer cross selling profile Ex: "B" -.

4) Path to created controlling area: Img-->Ent Str-->Defintio-->Controlling-->Maintain Controlling Area , here you can create controlling area

An Example Of Third Party Sales
Scenario: 2 companies are created in system - India & Singapore Customer places sales order for particular material on Singapore. Singapore is not able to produce the same. They pass on the order to India for processing. After processing India ships the material directly to the customer along with necessary documentation. Invoice copy is passed on to Singapore. Final Commercial Invoice will be raised by Singapore. How can the above scenario handled? By: Balaji You can do this using third party sales. The third party sales process is as under. 1) Singapore company creates an order for the singapore customer. 2) Because of the configuration settings of the sales document type, item category & schedule line category, as soon as the order is saved a PR (purchase requisition) is automatically generated. This is converted into PO (purchase order) and sent to the indan company. 3) Indian company supplies the material directly to the singapore customer. 4) Indian company sends the invoice to the singapore company. 5) Singapore company does the invoice verification in MM using tcode MIRO. 6) Singapore company raises the invoice to the singapore customer. In standard SAP, item category TAS is used for this. The schedule line category is CS. Here you can see a field 'order type' with value 'NB'. This triggers the automatic creation of the PR. Plus in the material master also you need to do certain settings. 1) If you are always following a third party process for a material then you have to create the material using item category group BANS. The procurement type should be marked as external procurement (F) in MRP 2 view of the material master record. 2) If you are not always allowing third party order processing then you can create a material master record with item category group as NORM and the procurement type should be marked as (X) meaning both types of procurement (in house manufacturing and external procurement).

In the item category the billing relevance should be 'F'.

Availability Check Availability Check on Quotation
SAP standard does not do an availability check on the quotation, as it is not a definite order, usually just a pricing quote. When it is converted to an order, the first availability check is carried out, as well as credit checks. The system will check stock in the plant, plus what is contained in the availability checking rule (scope of check) eg: can add POs for replenishment, purchase reqs, different planned orders, and subtract sales orders, deliveries etc already created against that material in that plant (and possibly Storage location). If there is enough stock in the plant/SLoc, the system will give you a confirmed date, or give you a date based on the production time or purchasing time from the material master. The date the system proposes is based on the customer's requested delivery date. SAP first backward schedules looking at the required delivery date, less transportation time, less transportation lead time, less pick and pack time, less production/purchase time if applicable. If the date it calculates is equal or later than today’s date, then it will confirm the customer’s required date. If it falls in the past, SAP will then forward schedule for today’s date, plus the times listed above to get the date when the customer can actually have it. ATP is the single most complex part of the SD module, depending upon how PP and MRP is set up. MRP works semi-separately, depending on how it is set up. Basically, MRP looks at the demand on the plant, and if it the stock does not meet expected sales orders and deliveries, it will create a purchase requisition (outside purchase) or requirement or planned order (for production) to cover the shortfall. When MRP is started, it will turn the PR into a PO or the requirement into a production order.

SD material Determination based on availability check
For SD material Determination you can create a Substitution reason and on the Strategy field, the following info. is available: Product selection in the background is performed on the basis of the availability check. We want to have the material determination only in case on material shortage. We expect the Substitution reason to give us this functionallity. It does not hovever take the availabilty into account before substitution. We thought the worse case is to create a ABAP which is linked to the "requirement" field in the Procedure (OV13). Has anyone had the same requirement? Is this a bug or just incorrectly documented?

I also encountered this abnormally recently using material determination. In order to combat the problem, the first product substitution should be for the original material. I've illustrated this below: Original Product: ABC Substitutes: DEF, XYZ In order to perform product substitution ONLY in the case of ATP failure for product ABC, structure the Material Determination record as follows: Material Entered: ABC Substitutes: ABC DEF XYZ There seems to be a devaition at availability check and or on a conceptual note still. Availability check can be configured both at requiremnt class and at the schedule line categories level. Whilst the availabilty check at the requirement class level via global and mandatory configuration the schedule line catgry availability check deals with the order. It is mandatory that the reqmnt class is flagged off for avlblty check and the schdelu line cat need not be. The following are the mandatory for Availability check to happen-1. Must be swithced on at the requirment class level and at the schedule line level. 2. Reqmnt type must exist by which a requiremnt class can be found 3. There must exist a plant and is defined 4.Checking group must be defined in Material Master records(it controls whthr the system is to create individual or collective reqmnt) A combination of checking gropup and checking rule will determine the scope of availbaility check.

Creating Multiple Materials in Material Determination
Material Determination is used to swap one material for another.It is possible to get a list of materials for substituiton,but remember you can substitue only one material from the list. This can be done through substituiton reason T Code [OVRQ] See the substitution reason number for Manual Material Selection - check the Entry box - check the Warning box - select A for Stategy - save. Go To VB11 to create Material Determination (taking into consideration that all the previous steps for material determiantion i.e. maintaining condition types,maintaining procedures for material determination and assigning procedures to sales doc. types have been done)

Create one material determination,dont forget to give the Subst reason on top and also on the line. Click the Variants Icon on top left-Sreen opens Specify different materials you want to swap with the material you have enterd Note that the subst reason is already copied on the screen Remember materials should be of the same sales area,atleast Divisions should be same.

Backward and Forward Scheduling
Backward scheduling is the calculation of deadline dates: the arrival time at the customer site is calculated as the earliest possible goods receipt time at the customers unloading point on the requested delivery date. All four of the delivery and transportation scheduling lead times are subtracted from the customer's requested delivery date to determine if this date can be met. The transit time, loading time, and pick/pack time are subtracted from the customer’s requested delivery date to calculate the required material availability date. The system calculates backward scheduling as follows: Requested delivery date minus transit time = Goods issue date Goods issue date minus loading time = Loading date Loading date minus transportation lead time = Transportation scheduling date Loading date minus pick/pack time = Material availability date By default, the system will calculate delivery dates the closest day, taking into consideration the working days of the shipping point and a rounding profile. In this case the system assumes a 24 hour work day and lead times can be entered in days up to 2 decimal points. This is referred to as daily scheduling. Precise scheduling calculated down to the day, hour and minute is supported. This allows the scheduling of a delivery within a single day. It is activated by maintaining the working hours for a particular shipping point. Backward scheduling is always carried out first. If the material availability date or transportation scheduling date is calculated to be in the past, the system must then use forward scheduling. Forward scheduling is also done if no product is available on the material availability date calculated by backward scheduling. The system does an availability check to determine the first possible date when product will be available. This new material availability date forms the starting point for scheduling the remaining activities. The loading time, pick/pack time, transit time, and transportation lead time are added to the new material availability date to calculate the confirmed delivery date.

Configuring Availability Check Through Checking Groups
1. The checking group + checking rule determine how the availability check is to be performed.

A requirements type must exist by which the requirements class can be found. 8. You can access (MD04) order. Advantages of individual processing over summarized processing – Backorder processing is possible. the checking rule is specified internally within the system and cannot be changed. The no check indicator is CHECKED when you DO NOT want the system to carry out ATP check.e. summarized requirements (daily/weekly) or individual requirements for each sales order. 3. Total sales and total deliveries columns are there to configure a checking rule to sum up requirements to post to MRP either individually or by day or week. Note that you must define checking rules for each individual application such as for production orders for example. 9. 4. In Sales and Distribution. The checking group defines what type of requirements will be passed on i. Required data for the Availability check to be carried out – The Availability check must be switched on at the requirement class level. 5. receipts and issues to be taken into account. Configuring Availability check and defining Checking Groups – Checking groups are introduced into the sales order based on the setting in the material master record. The checking rule applies to how the availability check is to be carried out at the transaction level. line and schedule line individually which gives a greater control on available stock and requirements placed on stock. For performing an availability check checking group has to work in conjunction with checking rule. in conjunction with the checking group. that is. The Availability check must be set at the schedule line level. Defining material block for other users – the block check box is an indicator that enables you to block material master records of a particular material during the . The checking rule. determines which stocks. Block quantity required can be set if you want several users to be able to process the material simultaneously in different transactions without blocking each other. which stocks. The checking group determines whether and how the system checks the stock availability and generates requirements for material planning. A checking group must be defined in the material master record in the MRP3 screen in the availability check field. SAP standard checking groups are 01 – summarized requirements and 02 – individual requirements or you can create your own by copying the standard ones. 7. A plant must be defined in the sales order for each schedule line item (in other words plant must be defined for every material in MMR).2. determines the scope of the availability check for every business operation. receipts and issues are to be included in the availability check and whether the check is to be carried out with or without the replenishment lead time. 6. The system automatically uses individual requirements in case of special stock items. Briefly explaining the above – checking group determines which type of requirement to be passed on to MRP whether it be individual or summarized and checking rule which is at the transaction level and can be configured independently for each application module.

you may indicate so here. Defining the elements in the availability check entirely depends on the business needs. RLT is the time taken for a material to become available. 11. 14. These settings carry out control both for sales order and delivery as well. 17. the system carries out the check at plant level only and does not take the storage location into account that is specified in the reservation. but a few tips are given under – When controlling the Availability check at the time of the sales order.Checking groups are introduced into the sales order based on the setting in the material master record. 13. 12. In this case. However. 15. A shipping notification on the other hand . C) Create orders for the material. Should you not want the system to automatically check RLT. Controlling Availability Check – in this section. the scope of the availability check is set in such a way as to exclude the storage location. It is used to switch off the check at storage location level. . If an entry exists. This default value will be used by the system depending on the material type mentioned in MMR and plant in sales order. It is only used when doing an ATP check and is taken from MMR. If you select this field. It is possible to indicate to the system that you would like the availability check NOT TO CHECK the stock at the storage location level. the material is blocked during the availability check and other users cannot: a) Make changes in the material master record. These settings are based on the checking group that is assigned to the material master record and the checking rule that is predefined and assigned to the sales and distribution transaction. 10.availability check and restrict other users from accessing same master record and reserve the material. not knowing if the stock is available or not. This indicator is used to set the scope of the availability check. 16. It is always recommended not to select the shipping notifications for the delivery requirements type as you may not actually receive the stock into plant or warehouse for which you are creating a delivery. Defining default values for checking groups . a purchase requisition does not necessarily indicate by it is going to come into the plant. a default value can be set here.a confirmed purchase order – is a good indicator of receiving stock on a specified date. b) Create purchase orders for the material. If the block is not set. This is due to the fact that you may want to include specific stock or incoming stock for the sales order. this default value is over written by MMR. You create a reservation for a particular storage location. you tell the system what stock on hand and what inward and outward movements of stock it must take into account when performing the availability check in addition to whether or not to consider the replenishment lead time. depending on material type and plant. two users can confirm the same material at the same time for two different orders. However if there is no entry present in the material master record for the checking group. yet at the time of the delivery only include physical stock on hand waiting to be shipped.

SD Document . It should have been blank. This report is basically is run in case of inconsistency of stock. I'm using service material. CO06 confirmed qty can't be change I want to change the confirmed qty in orders and use tcode CO06. but it prompt " please select a line that can be changed".Backorder Processing (rescheduling program SAPMV75B) V_V2 . deliveries. "Purchase requisition with delivery scheduling" is not checked and still the quantity is not confirmed on the sales order date (todays date). To solve your issue: T.Back Order Processing Using CO06 and V_V2 What are the difference between CO06 and V_V2 ? Both seem to be backorder rescheduling transactions. STO's etc then that stock can be released via this report. In Tab: Shipping. Confirm quantity in schedule line I'm using service material in my sales order and I need the schedule line to confirm the quantity always in the actual day (not depending on the delivery date). can someone tell me why the confirmed qty can't be changed.Create a sales order with todays date: 29-09-2009 . What I need is: .Back order Processing (rescheduling program SAPLATP4) V_RA . Check Box: Immediate Delivery (press F1 to read more about this functionality). Code: OVLZ Field: Pick/pack time wrkdys whether you have maintained any value.Schedule line: quantity confirmed on todays date 29-09-2009 But my quantity is confirmed for the next day. Code: VOV8 Select your Sales Doc. T. Note: There are few more settings that you may check: 1.Execute Rescheduling/ Rescheduling Sales and Stock Transfer Documents: by material The rescheduling program (SDV03V02) behind the V_V2. removal of confirmation of stock and if some stock is blocked under some unwanted processes like old SO's.Material . any restrict condition if I want to change it? Run the report SDRQCR21 for the said material/plant and then check if its confirmation from CO09 goes out or not.. . type and Double-Click. CO06 .. I selected the blue line .

item it self can be confirmed despite insufficient stock being available. purchase processing time and the goods receipt processing time. Code: VOV8 Check how many days mentioned in Lead time in Days. delivery documents. production orders. Code: OVZ9 Checked the Box: Check without RLT . RLT : It is the time that is needed to order or produce the requested material. the system determines the RLT according to specific times maintained in the material master record. For ex: In the case of trading goods it is determined according to the planned delivery time. for the required delivery date if the goods are available for all the necessary processing activities which take place before delivery. T. Check in material master MRP2 view how many days are maintained for the fields InHouse production and GR Processing Time. Check on the basis of ATP Quantities The ATP quantity is calculated from the ware house stock. T. etc. Check on the basis of ATP quantities (Available To Promise) 2. If the material availability data is calculated on the basis of current date to lie after the RLT. Check against Product Allocation 3.) This type of check is performed dynamically for each transaction with or without replenishment lead time (RLT). Depending on the material type RLT can be calculated according to various time periods. We need to customize SD Specific settings and General Settings . Types of availability check: There are 3 types of availability checks in sales document processing: 1. remove it. How to see the scope of ATP check? When we creat a sales order. we can only confirm the delivery of goods. If it is mentioned any days. 4. Availability check including RLT: Availability is checked up to the end of Replenishment Lead Time. Controlling availability check in sales document processing. etc) and The planned out ward movements of stock (Sales orders. In this case the system assumes that any quantity requested by the customer can be procured by the material availability date and consider the goods to be available. The planned inward movements of stocks (purchase orders. Check against planning. 3. planned orders.2.

the strategy groups are assigned to MRP groups depending on the Plant so that the strategy group is automatically proposed in the Material Master. Note: In customizing. SD Specific Control Features: 1. SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Define checking groups Checking rule: We use the checking rule to control the scope of availability check for each transaction the SD process. It is specified in the Material Master Record in MRP3 view.General Control Features: The following control elements need to be maintained in customizing and in the material master record. MRP group: The MRP group combines the material from the point of material requirements planning which is specified on the MRP1 view in the Material Master Data. SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Define procedure by requirement class Checking groups: Checking group controls whether the system is to create individual or collective requirements in sales and shipping process. Strategy group: The allowed planning strategies i. Requirements class: It controls all control features for planning and is also specifies whether the availability check is to take place for materials in the SD documents on the basis of ATP quantities and whether the requirements are to be passed on. Checking rule in the combination of checking group determines the scope of availability check . The checking group can also be used to deactivate the availability check.e. 1. 2. In addition a material block for the availability check with transfer of requirements can be set here. the main strategy and further possible strategies are combined in a strategy group.

The following elements can be involved in the availability check STOCKS: []Include safety stocks: Minimum stock at plant/ware house []Stock in transfer []Include quality inspection stock []Include Inward movement Out ward movement Purchase orders Sales requirements Purchase requisitions Deliveries Planned orders Release orders etc.Creating checking rule SPRO Material management Purchasing Purchase order Set up stock transport order Create checking rule Scope of availability check SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Carry out control for availability check Go to New Entries and define the scope of check in the combination of checking group and checking rule. Production orders If we do not check the field [] ‘check without RLT’ the system considers RLT while checking the availability of the material Note: Blocking the material for availability check SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning .

If a product selection item has been partially delivered. Give more insight about this program SDV03V02 or V_V2. cannot create sales orders. The system will not take the order account when rescheduling. This is causing some problems. or there is more product available. under Shipping tab. you can set the fixed date and qty indicator in the order (choose Goto --> Item --> Schedule lines). Note: During the Material Master creation the system automatically proposes the checking group. after entering the material code. This may result in products being promised to the customer other than those agreed to at the time of order entry. You have the options to set the Delivery Priority in the following areas:1) In Customer Master Sales Area Data. orders that contain items determined in product selection are reevaluated. When you reschedule (transaction V_V2). the system may determine other substitutes. If the substitution settings have changed. To avoid this. to consolidate. cannot create PO. The fixed date and quantity indicator does not influence product selection in the delivery. we can only prioritize in V_V2 depending on : 1. SPRO Sales and distribution Basic functions Availability check and transfer of requirements Availability check Availability check with ATP planning or against planning Define checking groups default values. the system does not take it into account in rescheduling runs. . We run this program every night at our company to reschedule the sales orders which is pushing back some of the orders that are to be delivered in the next few days too. We need to assign the checking group to the combination of material type and plant.Define material block for other users If we check the field Block [] during the availability check of a material the users cannot make changes in the Material Master. just click on the blue lens so that you can set the delivery priority for the combination of customer and material So. 2) In Customer Material Info record (VD51). Items determined in product selection are only considered in a rescheduling run when you have set the input parameters to include all materials. you have the option of setting Delivery Priority. main and sub-items from product selection are excluded. If you specify only certain materials. Further the following setting is required. Customer priority set in shipping tab under delivery priority.

Problem with Down payment settlement using installment payment term. Advance from customer 30 Cr.2. if Customer . 3. it gives more priority to standard sales document type which is OR even though there are other sales document types. The system takes the delivery priority first from Customer . Customer . AR 30 (*split AR by installment payment term) AR 40 AR 30 Cr. 1st record is Downpayment request 30% of Order value. The accounting document is as below Dr. it will document as Noted item in the accounting document. etc. AR 9 (DP. Settlement Downpayment with Installment payment Term Scenario :. Delivery date on the schedule line level. V_V2 -> It is a Rescheduling process of backorders. billing type is FAZ . Date of order creation. Advance from customer 30 4. Create Billing type Down payment request . I specify 2 records. it gives more priority to OR then other STO document types like NLCC. the down payment value will be proposed for settlement at Billing Creation. the 2nd record is Final invoice 100%. CO06 -> It is also backorder processing but based on material . Document Date. 30%. Tell me the difference between CO06 and V_V2. Sales 100 Dr. billing type is F2. Generally.Material info record.Material info record is not maintained then it checks the CMR delivery priority . 40%. 1. 3. 4.Material info record. When we create Sales order. I then accept the default value of down payment clearing. Both seem to be backorder rescheduling transactions. Document Number and 6. Cash/Bank 30 Cr. at this stage the asccounting document is created as following Dr. 30%). Receive Downpayment from customer via FI screen . 5. When I create Billing document for the sales item. (sales item value = 100) use payment term : 0009 (Installment Payment term. 2. In the Billing Plan. 30% * 30) .

AR 30 Cr. following the above case we sometimes use this with our PS orders: 1. I want only 1 line item of credit.70%. the 2nd & 3rd records are std F2 invoices 30% . However.Cr AR 12 (DP. Many users object to the down payment or security lodgement mechanism. Sales 60 . Sales 30 Dr. Create Billing type Down payment request . Sales 100 Dr. billing type is FAZ . Create Sales order. 2. (sales item value = 100) with billing plan with three steps 30% down payment. 3. The accounting document is as below Dr. AR 30 5. AR 30 (Not separate by Installment payment term) Solutions : Suggesstions on how I could proceed? Your problem with Down payment settlement is common. the accounting should be Dr. AR 60 Cr. at this stage the accounting document is created as following :Dr. 30% * 40) Cr AR 9 (DP. Create the Second Billing document ( down payment value has expired and will not be proposed) The accounting document is as below is then standard for the last installement.30% std billiing on order completion and 70% on delivery. A little different to your original Billing Plan. AR 30 (*split AR by installment payment term) AR 40 AR 30 Cr. I meant. Cash/Bank 30 Cr. 30% * 30) It seems SAP settlement Down payment by Installment Payment term. then accept the default value of down payment clearing as these equal each other. the down payment value will be proposed for settlement at Billing Creation. Dr. it will document as Noted item in the accounting document. Create the First Billing documents . Advance from customer 30 Cr. Security deposit payment 30 ( In many countries this may be subject to TAX laws) 4. In our case we often park and apply the advance manually to final invoice. but 1st record is Downpayment request 30% of Order value. I don't want to have the last 3 Credit item as above. Advance from customer 30 Cr. I was wondering that is there are alternative or an option to setup the Down payment settlement independent of Installment term. Receive Downpayment from customer via FI screen .

no scale ROW 4 BKOND2 .no scale ROW 5 BKOND3 .Upload Condition Pricing RV14BTCI . Envirionment : 4. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STYPE | Record type | 000001 | 000000 | | GROUP | Group name | 000012 | 000000 | | MANDT | Client | 000003 | 000000 | | 0 | BI Session Name | Your client no | CHAR | CHAR | CLNT .Session Header Record ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| Field name | Description | Length | Dec. | | Report header | Cat. you have to use SM35 to process the update program.no scale Sample flat file for uploading table A305 .This alternative provides a cleaner option with the Downpayment Customized SD ABAP Reports Sales and Distribution .Customer/Material with release status :0BIPRICE 123SAPABAP X 1VK15 A305V PR00 2ALL 990000123456SAP8204142100 2002043020020401 50USD 100PC 2ALL 990000123456SAP8217168100 2002043020020401 50USD 100PC 3 100PC 2 3 200PC 1 2ALL 990000123456SAP8220133910 There a total of 4 flat file format :BGR00 .6x Require flat file :ROW 1 BGR00 ROW 2 BKOND1 ROW 3 BKOND2 .Batch Input for Uploading Condition Pricing After executing the program.with scale ROW 6 BKOND2 .

Main Data Record .Header Record ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| Field name | Description | Length | Dec. 305 | App e. | | Report header | Cat.g PR00 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BKOND2 . ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STYPE | Record type | 000001 | 000000 | | TCODE | Transaction code | 000020 | 000000 | | KVEWE | Usage | 000001 | 000000 | | KOTABNR | Table | 000003 | 000000 | | KAPPL | Application | 000002 | 000000 | | KSCHL | Condition type | 000004 | 000000 | | 1 | TCode = VK15 | U | Table e.g V | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CTyp e.don't delete SESS| CHAR | / | CHAR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BKOND1 .| USNAM | User ID | 000012 | 000000 | | START | Lock until: | 000010 | 000000 | | XKEEP | Keep indicator | 000001 | 000000 | | NODATA | No batch input | 000001 | 000000 | | Queue user ID | Queue start date | CHAR | DATS | X .g.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STYPE | Record type | 000001 | 000000 | | VAKEY | VarKey | 000100 | 000000 | | DATBI | Valid to | 000010 | 000000 | | DATAB | Valid on | 000010 | 000000 | | KBETR | Amount | 000015 | 000000 | | KONWA | R/2 table | 000005 | 000000 | | KPEIN | R/2 table | 000005 | 000000 | | KMEIN | | 000003 | 000000 | | MWSK1 | Tax code | 000002 | 000000 | | KONMS | Scale UoM | 000003 | 000000 | | MXWRT | Amount | 000015 | 000000 | | GKWRT | Amount | 000015 | 000000 | | STFKZ | Scale type | 000001 | 000000 | | KZNEP | Exclusion | 000001 | 000000 | | LOEVM_KO | Deletion indic. | | Report header | Cat.----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | Field name | Description | Length | Dec. | 000001 | 000000 | | 2 | VarKey | Valid to | Valid on | Amount | R2tab | R2tab | | Tx | UoM | Amount | Amount | S | CndEx | D | CHAR | CHAR | DATS | DATS | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | UNIT | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR | CHAR .

Change Date * 2.Scale Data Record ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| Field name | Description | Length | Dec. .com * REPORT ZSDCHANGE LINE-SIZE 132 NO STANDARD PAGE HEADING LINE-COUNT 065(001) MESSAGE-ID VR.| SKONWA | R/2 table | 000005 | 000000 | | R2tab | CHAR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- BKOND3 . TABLES: DD04T.sap-img. | | Report header | Cat. Sales Order Number * * Submitted by : SAP Basis. CDHDR. ABAP Programming and Other IMG Stuff * http://www. User Name * 3. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| STYPE | Record type | 000001 | 000000 | | KSTBM | Quantity | 000018 | 000000 | | KONMS | Scale UoM | 000003 | 000000 | | KBETR | Amount | 000015 | 000000 | | 3 | Quantity | UoM | Amount | CHAR | CHAR | UNIT | CHAR ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Sales Order Changed History Display * * Sales Order Changed History Display * * You can execute the report by : * 1.

TPART. CHANGENR LIKE CDHDR-CHANGENR. CLEAR CDPOS. DD41V. INDTEXT(200). WCHANGENR LIKE CDHDR-CHANGENR. WDEC4 TYPE P DECIMALS 3. R1. WDEC3 TYPE P DECIMALS 3. XNAME FOR ICDHDR-USERNAME. DATA: WFLAG. WUDATE LIKE CDHDR-UDATE. WNAME LIKE CDHDR-USERNAME. INCLUDE STRUCTURE CDSHW. T685T. SELECT-OPTIONS: XUDATE FOR ICDHDR-UDATE. DATA: BEGIN OF ICDSHW OCCURS 50. INCLUDE STRUCTURE CDSHW. R1. END OF ITAB. WITH FRAME TITLE TEXT-001. DATA: UTEXT(16) VALUE 'has been changed'. USERNAME LIKE CDHDR-USERNAME. WDEC2 TYPE P DECIMALS 3. DATA: BEGIN OF ICDHDR OCCURS 50. KONVC. ETENR(4). VBELN(10). DTEXT(16) VALUE 'has been deleted'. WDEC1 TYPE P DECIMALS 3. DATA: BEGIN OF ITAB OCCURS 10.CDPOS. VBUK. POSNR(6). DATA: UDATE LIKE CDHDR-UDATE. VBPA. ITEXT(16) VALUE 'has been created'. SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK BLK1 PARAMETERS: SUDATE RADIOBUTTON GROUP SNAME RADIOBUTTON GROUP SOBID RADIOBUTTON GROUP SELECTION-SCREEN END OF BLOCK BLK1. XVBELN FOR VBUK-VBELN. SELECT * FROM VBUK WHERE VBELN IN XVBELN. DD03L. INCLUDE STRUCTURE CDHDR. R1. CLEAR CDHDR. DATA: END OF ICDSHW. SELECTION-SCREEN SKIP. WVBELN LIKE VBUK-VBELN. . DATA: END OF ICDHDR. CDHDR-OBJECTCLAS = 'VERKBELEG'.

SELECT SINGLE * FROM TPART WHERE SPRAS = SY-LANGU AND PARVW = VBPA-PARVW. ENDIF. ENDIF. CASE ITAB-TABNAME. MOVE ITAB-TABKEY TO KONVC. ELSEIF SOBID = 'X'. WHEN 'VBPA'. WHEN 'VBAP'. LOOP AT ITAB. ELSE. CONDENSE ITAB-INDTEXT. IF ITAB-CHNGIND = 'I'. ELSEIF ITAB-CHNGIND = 'U'. PERFORM READPOS. WHEN 'KONVC'. ENDIF. IF SY-SUBRC = 0. PERFORM READHEADER. . ENDSELECT. ENDLOOP. SELECT SINGLE * FROM T685T WHERE SPRAS = SY-LANGU AND KVEWE = 'A' AND KAPPL = 'V' AND KSCHL = KONVC-KSCHL. ELSE. MODIFY ITAB. ENDIF. REPLACE '%' WITH DTEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. LOOP AT ITAB.CDHDR-OBJECTID = VBUK-VBELN. SORT ITAB BY VBELN POSNR ETENR UDATE. REPLACE '&' WITH ITAB-FTEXT(40) INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. ENDIF. IF ITAB-FNAME IS INITIAL. ENDIF. REPLACE '&' WITH 'Item' INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. SORT ITAB BY UDATE VBELN POSNR ETENR. REPLACE '&' WITH TPART-VTEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. MOVE ITAB-TABKEY TO VBPA. ENDCASE. REPLACE '%' WITH ITEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. REPLACE '&' WITH T685T-VTEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. REPLACE '%' WITH UTEXT INTO ITAB-INDTEXT. IF ITAB-INDTEXT(1) EQ '&'. SORT ITAB BY USERNAME VBELN POSNR ETENR UDATE. IF SUDATE = 'X'. ENDIF. IF ITAB-FNAME = 'KUNNR' OR ITAB-FNAME = 'LIFNR' OR ITAB-FNAME = 'PARNR' OR ITAB-FNAME = 'PERNR' OR ITAB-FNAME IS INITIAL. CLEAR WFLAG. IF SY-SUBRC = 0.

ELSE. ENDIF. ELSE. ENDIF. 065 ITAB-INDTEXT(60). WRITE: /013 ITAB-CHNGIND. WNAME = ITAB-USERNAME. WRITE:/001 ITAB-UDATE. SKIP. FORM READHEADER. 037(10) ITAB-VBELN. WRITE:/023 ITAB-USERNAME. WFLAG = 'X'. ENDIF. 057 ITAB-ETENR. CALL FUNCTION 'CHANGEDOCUMENT_READ_HEADERS' EXPORTING DATE_OF_CHANGE = CDHDR-UDATE OBJECTCLASS = CDHDR-OBJECTCLAS OBJECTID = CDHDR-OBJECTID TIME_OF_CHANGE = CDHDR-UTIME USERNAME = CDHDR-USERNAME TABLES I_CDHDR = ICDHDR EXCEPTIONS NO_POSITION_FOUND = 1 OTHERS = 2. WRITE:/001 ITAB-USERNAME. IF WNAME NE ITAB-USERNAME. WCHANGENR = ITAB-CHANGENR. 037(10) ITAB-VBELN. 023 ITAB-USERNAME. IF WUDATE NE ITAB-UDATE.IF SUDATE = 'X'. SKIP. ENDIF. WCHANGENR = ITAB-CHANGENR. WRITE:/065 ITAB-F_OLD. WRITE:/065 ITAB-F_NEW. ENDIF. WVBELN = ITAB-VBELN. SKIP. WRITE: 013 ITAB-CHNGIND. 049 ITAB-POSNR. WFLAG = 'X'. WRITE:/001 ITAB-VBELN. IF WCHANGENR NE ITAB-CHANGENR. IF WVBELN NE ITAB-VBELN. WUDATE = ITAB-UDATE. ELSEIF SOBID NE 'X'. ENDIF. 049 ITAB-POSNR. IF WFLAG = 'X'. 065 ITAB-INDTEXT(60). . 057 ITAB-ETENR. ENDLOOP.

ENDCASE. ENDLOOP. WHEN '0000'. LEAVE. CASE SY-SUBRC. WHEN '0000'. LOOP AT ICDHDR. WHEN OTHERS. MOVE ICDSHW-TABKEY+3(10) TO ITAB-VBELN. WHEN '0001'.CASE SY-SUBRC. FORM READPOS. CHECK ICDSHW-CHNGIND NE 'E'. ENDCASE. . CALL FUNCTION 'CHANGEDOCUMENT_READ_POSITIONS' EXPORTING CHANGENUMBER = ICDHDR-CHANGENR TABLEKEY = CDPOS-TABKEY TABLENAME = CDPOS-TABNAME IMPORTING HEADER = CDHDR TABLES EDITPOS = ICDSHW EXCEPTIONS NO_POSITION_FOUND = 1 OTHERS = 2. MOVE ICDSHW-TABKEY+19(4) TO ITAB-ETENR. APPEND ITAB. LOOP AT ICDSHW. MOVE ICDHDR-OBJECTID TO ITAB-VBELN. CLEAR ITAB. MOVE-CORRESPONDING ICDHDR TO ITAB. MOVE ICDSHW-TABKEY+13(6) TO ITAB-POSNR. CLEAR ITAB. MOVE-CORRESPONDING ICDSHW TO ITAB. ENDLOOP. MOVE '& %' TO ITAB-INDTEXT. ENDFORM. LEAVE. LEAVE. MESSAGE S311. MOVE ICDSHW-TABKEY(6) TO ITAB-POSNR. WHEN OTHERS. CHECK ICDHDR-USERNAME IN XNAME. ENDFORM. CHECK ICDHDR-UDATE IN XUDATE. WHEN '0002'. ENDCASE. WHEN 'KONVC'. MESSAGE S311. CASE ITAB-TABNAME. MESSAGE S311.

Depending on the modification. 037 'Sale Order'. 037 'Sale Order'. 50 'SALES ORDER CHANGE HISTORY'. WRITE:/001 'User Name'. 049 'Line'. ENDIF. 065 'Changes'. WRITE:/001 'Sale Order'. 120 'Page'.SY-UZEIT. 041 'Time'. you make the changes in the program components provided: .System Modifications --. WRITE:/001 'Change Date'. . 057 'Sch No'. 013 'Time'. You will have User exit for . 013 'Line'. 015 'Time'. This IMG step describes additional installation-specific processing in sales document processing. ULINE. 049 'Line'.User Exits There you will find all the details by checking IMG Activity Documentation. 021 'Sch No'.TOP-OF-PAGE. ULINE. WRITE: / SY-REPID. User-specific metadata must start with "ZZ".MV45ATZZ For entering metadata for sales document processing. 065 'Comment'. 025 'Change Date'. 057 'Sch No'. WRITE:/ SY-DATUM. *--. the required INCLUDES and user exits are described. 60 'SALES ORDERS STATISTICS'.End of Program Where to find the User Exits on Sales and Distribution along with functionality? To see the detail go to SPRO --. SKIP. 023 'User Name'. 051 'User Name'. ELSE. IF SUDATE = 'X'.Sales and Distribution ---. SY-PAGNO. 065 'Changes'. ELSEIF SOBID = 'X'. Involved program components System modifications for sales document processing affect different areas.Sales Document Processing. In particular. 029 'Change Date'.

USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE (Module pool SAPLV60A. table TVFKD is used to set the billing date (countryspecific requirements in Italy). USEREXIT_ACCOUNT_PREP_KOMPCV (Module pool SAPLV60A) In this user exit additional fields for account determination that are not provided in the standard system are copied into communication structure KOMPCV (item fields). This user exit is only called when the billing documents is created. which may be required and can be used if necessary. data validation). These are called up by the screen and run under PAI (Process After Input) after data input (for example. program RV60AFZZ) In this user exit additional fields for account determination that are not provided in the standard system are copied into communication structure KOMKCV (header fields). It is used to provide the header and the item of the new billing document with deviating or additional data. program RV60AFZC) Depending on the number range. these all are trigger during VF02. . USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE_INV_DATE (Module pool SAPLV60A. What are the user exit for billing document release to accounting? Please check below exits/customer exits. USEREXIT_PRINT_ITEM (Module pool SAPLV61A.MV45AIZZ For entering additional installation-specific modules for sales document processing. . The modules must start with "ZZ". The modules must start with "ZZ". USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE is automatically deactivated when this user exit is being applied. program RV60AFZZ) The internal number range used in the standard system is specified in the billing type table and can be changed in this user exit. These program components are called up by the modules in MV45AOZZ or MV45AIZZ. USEREXIT_ACCOUNT_PREP_KOMKCV (Module pool SAPLV60A.. . program RV61AFZB) Printing the item line of a billing document can be supplemented or changed. You will find all User Exits on Sales and Distribution along with functionality.MV45AFZZ and MV45EFZ1 For entering installation-specific FORM routines and for using user exits.MV45AOZZ For entering additional installation-specific modules for sales document processing which are called up by the screen and run under PBO (Process Before Output) prior to output of the screen. program RV60AFZC) This user exit is only called when the billing document is created. USEREXIT_FILL_VBRK_VBRP (Module pool SAPLV60A.

EXIT_SAPLV60B_007: Change the installment plan You can use exit 007 to add information to the installment plan parameters in the GL account item. EXIT_SAPLV60B_002: Change the customer line ACCIT You can use this exit to change the customer line in the accounting document. you can change the business transaction. EXIT_SAPLV60B_005: User exit for accruals Once all relevant data for accruals was entered in the GL account item. For example. "created on" date and time. EXIT_SAPLV60B_0011: Change the parameter for cash account determination or reconciliation account determination You can use this exit to change inbound parameters in order to influence account determination. EXIT_SAPLV60B_004: Change a GL account item ACCIT You can add information to a GL account item (such as quantity specifications) with this exit. Note: . User exits in program RV60AFZD Short descriptions of the user exits are contained in the program: USEREXIT_RELI_XVBPAK_AVBPAK USEREXIT_NEWROLE_XVBPAK_AVBPAK USEREXIT_NEWROLE_XVBPAP_AVBPAK The following user exits are available in report SAPLV60B for transfer to accounting (function group V60B): EXIT_SAPLV60B_001: Change the header data in the structure acchd You can use this exit to influence the header information of the accounting document.USEREXIT_PRINT_HEAD (Module pool SAPLV61A. EXIT_SAPLV60B_008: Change the transfer structure ACCCR. you can add to this data with this exit. ACCIT and ACCHD After the accounting document is filled in with data. EXIT_SAPLV60B_010: Item table for customer lines You can use exit 10 to influence the contents of customer lines before they are created. you can use exit 008 to change the document once again. You can use exit 003 to influence the ACCIT structure. EXIT_SAPLV60B_003: Change the customer line in costing The customer line is filled in differently for costing. EXIT_SAPLV60B_006: Change the control line ACCIT You can use exit 006 to add information to the control line. This exit is processed once the ACCIT structure is filled in with data from document header VBRK. the name of the person who created it or the transaction with which the document was created. Program RV61AFZB) Printing the header line of a billing document can be supplemented or changed.

Use enhancement "SDVFX008". (Using Sales Order in SD) 2. Transfer Posting from block stock to unrestricted stock (mvt type 453). Component : "EXIT_SAPLV60B_008". In the standard system the movement type used is 651. Check whether the function exit is activated. Goods Issue to scrap account how to create new titles which can be used in creating the "address" view on the Vendor master. this will have accounting effect (Debit Inventory. 4. The steps are as follows : 1. Create outbound delivery according to return request. or goods that had been delivered for sale on approval. 6. Credit COGS) 8. The setting is in sales order item category and delivery type. 5. We have done similar development to update SGTXT field in BSEG.Delivery (returns delivery) . 7. blocked stock).Billing (for creating a credit memo) . If the setting is correct in the outbound delivery screen SAP will automatically switch post goods issue button into post goods receipt. Create a credit memo. The return causes the system to: Register the receipt of goods using a returns delivery. and post the goods to stock (for example. and what should we do if a replacement is not issued? A return is a sales document used in complaints processing for when a customer sends goods back. The return triggers the following functions: . After post goods issues receipt is done using outbound delivery. Create a return request. You will then decide if the return quantity are indeed bad stock or not. once you have checked the goods and approved the complaint. the quantity is placed in blocked stock without value updating. A return is another type of sales document like a standard order. Customer Return material From customer You need to receipt the rejected goods through SD Module (VA01 . 3. SDVFX008 will indeed trigger while you create accounting document through VF01 or VF02.{T-Code: XK01} In config go to Basis Components --> basis services --> Address Management --> Maintain title texts What processes are involved with Customer Returns? How do we create a replacement order.Sales Order type RE). You enter a return in the system if the customer returns damaged goods.

delivery. The movement types are entered in the schedule lines in customizing. the billing type is picked up as RE (Return Credit Memo) automatically. it should be cancelled beforehand.Approve the complaint. the Customer Account needs to be credited. But rather than VL09." The accounting document takes the cost "from" the project and moves it back "to" the storage location. in this process. The delivery type for this replacement order type will be LF and billing type F2. If you do not give replacement. and implement a free of charge subsequent delivery based on the return . There are 2 types of customers wholesale and retail. If you have a delivery related invoice. you can create a replacement order. Please do not forget to create a Billing document (Formally Return Credit Memo) with reference to return delivery. When you create a return order type RE. Answer: Generally the usage of customer group is to group the customers into One group so that whenever you want to give some additional discount to that customer group then you can give Example : Say you have 2 customers and 2 customers have 2 pricing groups. "no invoice" takes place. VL09 creates the movement type 602 Q. your delivery will keep appearing in the "Billing Due" list and with status "Being processed". you can define an order type by copying from order type OR. you can define the relevant item categories from RE to OR. Customer A belongs to . we use project stock (movement type 601 Q for PGI). To create the replacement order. In my company. In the copy control. which are then assigned to the item categories. implement one of the following activities: . If you do not create a return credit memo. the generally accepted method in my company for the reverse items is to use the movement type 653.When you create a return based on a complaint. The accounting document is just the reverse of the original PGI document. and billing. "back to the to the storage location. It is very important in order to close the cycle. Usage of price group in customer master Have a business requirement like this: The price group field is used for different discount rates for the customers.Approve the complaint and create a credit memo . you: Post the goods to your warehouse for checking And then. When you are creating a replacement. I am not sure of the usage of price groups in customer master to use for the discount for the customers.Reject the complaint PGI (Post Goods Issue) may be cancelled by Transaction code VL09. However. You can make reference Mandatory for this order type.

.Allocation Procedure (OV1Z) The product allocation procedure is the parent of the entire allocation process.You are assigning customers H to J in price group 3 in their respective CMRs. . Transaction code --> OVSL Implement the Product Allocation Functionality We are required to implement product allocation functionality in SAP R/3 (Enterprise Version). Say there are 10 customers A to J. Suppose if you have 3 price groups say price group1 price group2 and price group3. Can you kindly help by giving the simple steps for implementation. Now for wholesale you give extra discount and for retail you give less discount.You are assigning customers A to D in price group 1. Maintain a condition record With the help of the Customer / Pricing grp key combination. Price group can be added as filed in pricing condition table and you can maintain condition records for them: In VK11 the table with price group 1 is maintained discount of 5 % In VK11 the table with price group 2 is maintained discount of 6 % In VK11 the table with price group 3 is maintained discount of 7 % So in sales order the customers A to D will get 5 % discount and customers E to G will get 6 % discount and customers H to J will get 7 % discount. How can I create a customer price group? Please go through this IMG path then define the Customer pricing group. All materials that are to be included in the allocation scheme are . We tried to do the elaborate steps as per the implementation guide but are not successful. Please see if the following helps: Configuration Overview.Wholesale Pricing grp and Customer B belongs to Retail Pricing grp. Allocation Specific Usage 1. Now when you create the sales order with Customer A then he will be getting extra discount But if you create the sales order with Customer B then he will be getting normal discount Price group is a field where you can group certain customers under one umbrella. .You are assigning customers E to G in price group 2. SPRO --> IMG --> Sales and Distribution --> Basic Functions ------> Pricing --> Maintain Price relevant master data fields ---> Define Pricing group for Customers.

the user can assign a step level to the procedure and information structure to sequence the order in which allocation quantities are checked.0.Allocation Hierarchy Mapping (OV3Z) Primarily.required to have an allocation procedure assigned to it in the material master. Finally. 7.Create Planning Hierarchy (MC61) In order to adequately establish allocation quantities. This functionality allows the user the opportunity to check product allocation against several product allocation scenarios.Activate Allocation for Requirement Class (OVZ0) In order to turn on allocation in the standard order processing functionality. The consumption window indicates the number of past and future periods to be used in the allocation check. before the required quantity is confirmed 4.Allocation Object (OV2Z) The allocation object is the root level of the allocation process where actual data is entered and planned in LIS. the user has the option of establishing a conversion factor per allocation control record to accommodate BOM listings of constrained materials 6. the user must initially determine the level at which the allocation is to take place and the aggregation factor of the allocation quantities. Finally. as of release 4. this transaction permits the assignment of an allocation procedure to an LIS information structure. allocation control records are created primarily to map allocation procedure steps to their corresponding objects so that the allocation data records can be located for validation. validity periods must be established to indicate when the allocation control records are active. If you have de-selected the method field. it is in the procedure that the method of allocation is defined.Control Product Allocation (OV4Z) In order for the allocation process to function properly. In this step. the levels for the collective allocation search procedure are also identified.Activate Allocation for Schedule Line Category (OVZ8) In order to turn on allocation in the standard order processing functionality. the requirements class must have a flag indicating that allocation is relevant. the schedule line must have a flag indicating that allocation is relevant 8. The object allows the user to further break down a procedure into smaller parts for future validation of components comprising a specific material 3. the collective allocation masking character must be generated to allow aggregation indicators to be established. 5. This transaction simply reads the hierarchy established in the planning table and then generates a collective mask character for each level of the hierarchy . a character is assigned to the information structure to permit collective planning. The user has the opportunity to set an indicator to identify their choice of two different methods (discrete and cumulative allocation) to evaluate the quantities to be considered for product allocation.Define Consumption Periods (OV5Z) The allocation consumption periods functionality is only valid if the allocation method flag has been set (OV1Z). Secondly. Secondly. In addition. 2.Generate Masking Character (OV7Z) Upon completion of the level determination for the planning hierarchy. 9. this functionality is not available.

List of Suitable Structures (OV9Z) This report is used to identify potential LIS information structures that can be used in the product allocation process. your SAP system must be configure by the basis people in order for you to send an external mail. In order to complete the hierarchical set up. Date. the allocation data is verified prior to confirming the line item ordered 12. Each material that is to be considered in allocation scenario must be mapped to an allocation procedure.5A. the system does no longer display the actions for SD picking in the implementation guide. then. This data can then be utilized in the mapping transaction (OV3Z) to link the allocation procedure step to an information structure (previous step). Output/Email Sending a billing document by e-mail First. you have define the IMG in Maintain Output Determination for Billing Documents (Output type MAIL) SAP Customizing Picking Output From Release 4. when a material is entered with a valid allocation procedure in the material master.10. Customer . the collective allocation (mask character) hierarchy must now be maintained with the appropriate aggregation factors 11.Allocation Procedure Assignment to Material Master (MM02) At the root level of the allocation process are the materials. Program for Sales Order by Customer.Modify Planning Hierarchy (MC62) This step is a repeat of MC61 where the initial hierarchy was established. In order entry.To create the Sales Order by More no of Date's . This report simply reads through the data dictionary and selects all the active information structures that contain the field product allocation object (KONOB) as the first field. Whether it can send pdf or other file format will depends on the Mail Server you are using. Finally. Sales Sales Order by Organisation. The basis people must also maintain the conversion parameters so that SAP knows how to convert the billing documents to be send as a pdf file or other desired format specified by your company. If you want to use the picking list according to the "old" procedure. o Carry out Transaction V/53 to assign the picking lists to own forms and programs. you can maintain the list as follows: o Carry out Transaction V/38 to maintain the output types. o Carry out Transaction OVLT to assign the picking list types to the shipping points.

2007 8530 732 1000 INR *&---------------------------------------------------------------------* *& Report ZCHE_SALES_ORDER *&--------Done by V. dat LIKE vbak-erdat. . END OF sal.Sales Organisation . SELECTION-SCREEN END OF BLOCK blk1. DATA: BEGIN OF sal OCCURS 0.vbpa.date4(1). dat LIKE vbak-erdat."Screens. DATA: newsal LIKE sal OCCURS " sales document "Net Value of the SalesOrder "material no. date5(2). DATA: lin LIKE sy-curow VALUE 1.vakpa.Date . vbeln LIKE vbak-vbeln. date2(15). "date. 0 WITH HEADER LINE.". netwr LIKE vbak-netwr. vtweg LIKE vepvg-vtweg.01.01. checkbox TYPE c .date3(8).Sales Order Example Date SalesOrderNo Material Amount Currency 10.vbap. ch TYPE checkbox. vapma. SELECT-OPTIONS date FOR vbkd-bstdk DEFAULT sy-datum TO sy-datum OBLIGATORY.date6(2).vepvg.Chellavelu on 11.Customer this will be usefull when Selecting the Checkbox Standard Variants . PARAMETERS: vkorg LIKE vepvg-vkorg. ****************************Declarations******************************** TABLES: vbkd. vertical cursor position at "PAI available in SYST struc. *******************Selection**Screen**Design**************************** SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK blk1 WITH FRAME TITLE text-001. matnr LIKE vbap-matnr.User's can easily take the Report from this by selecting Different kinds like Customer Specific [And/Or] Sales Organisation Specific [And/Or] duration of date but Here Date is Mandatory Fields user must have to give date as a selection criteria In Second level this report will interact with user where they can select date to see the full Details of Sales Order Selection . waerk LIKE vbak-waerk. DATA: amount LIKE vbak-netwr.vbak. spart LIKE vepvg-spart. "curr.2007 --------------------------* REPORT zche_sales_order .Output .

SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF BLOCK blk2 WITH FRAME TITLE text-002. SELECTION-SCREEN BEGIN OF LINE. SELECTION-SCREEN POSITION 10. PARAMETERS: chk1 AS CHECKBOX. SELECTION-SCREEN POSITION 20. PARAMETERS: kunnr1 LIKE vbpa-kunnr. SELECTION-SCREEN END OF LINE. SELECTION-SCREEN END OF BLOCK blk2. ********************First**Level**Operation***************************** IF chk1 <> 'X'. IF vkorg <> ''. PERFORM organisation. ELSE. PERFORM organisation_else. ENDIF. ELSE. IF vkorg <> ''. PERFORM cus_orga. ELSE. PERFORM cus_orga_else. ENDIF. ENDIF. * Displaying the contents which is selected from table by * -selection conditions SORT sal BY dat. LOOP AT sal. ON CHANGE OF sal-dat. * FORMAT HOTSPOT ON. IF sy-tabix = 1. WRITE: sy-vline, sal-ch AS CHECKBOX,sal-dat . CLEAR amount. ELSE. WRITE:sy-vline, amount,/ sy-vline, sal-ch AS CHECKBOX,sal-dat. CLEAR amount. ENDIF. ENDON. amount = amount + sal-netwr. AT LAST. WRITE:sy-vline, amount. ULINE. SUM. * FORMAT HOTSPOT OFF. FORMAT COLOR = 3. WRITE:/ ' Total Amount:', sal-netwr UNDER amount. ENDAT. ENDLOOP. **********************Interaction with report************************** SET PF-STATUS 'BANU'. " To create Application ToolBar for Display Button * To verify Double click on BANU

AT USER-COMMAND. " This will execute after pressing Display Button CASE sy-ucomm. WHEN 'DISP'. free newsal. DO. READ LINE lin FIELD VALUE sal-ch INTO checkbox. IF sy-subrc NE 0. EXIT. ENDIF. IF checkbox = 'X'. PERFORM datecon. PERFORM process. ENDIF. lin = lin + 1. ENDDO. PERFORM selection. ENDCASE. ************************ SUB ROUTINE Area ****************************** *This Process SubRoutine will assign the values from current * -InternalTable (sal) into other IT(newsal), by date which is * - selected by CheckBox FORM process. LOOP AT sal WHERE dat = dat. newsal-ch = 'X'. newsal-vbeln = sal-vbeln. newsal-netwr = sal-netwr. newsal-matnr = sal-matnr. newsal-waerk = sal-waerk. newsal-dat = sal-dat. APPEND newsal. ENDLOOP. ENDFORM. "process *&---------This will display the values for selected dates from new --* *---------------------internal Table (newsal)-------------------------* *& Form SELECTION *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM selection. ULINE. FORMAT COLOR = 1. WRITE:sy-vline,'Date',AT 14 sy-vline, 'Order NO', AT 27 sy-vline, 'Order Material', AT 48 sy-vline,'Order Value(AMT) Currency '. FORMAT COLOR OFF. ULINE. LOOP AT newsal. ON CHANGE OF newsal-dat. IF sy-tabix <> 1. WRITE:/ sy-vline, AT 14 sy-vline,AT 27 sy-vline,AT 48 sy-vline. WRITE:/ sy-vline,newsal-dat,sy-vline,AT 27 sy-vline,AT 48 sy-vline. ELSE. WRITE: sy-vline,newsal-dat,sy-vline,AT 27 sy-vline,AT 48 sy-vline. ENDIF. ENDON. WRITE:/ sy-vline, AT 14 sy-vline,newsal-vbeln,sy-vline, newsal-matnr, sy-vline, newsal-netwr, newsal-waerk.

AT LAST. SUM. ULINE. FORMAT COLOR = 3. WRITE:/ sy-vline, AT 15 'Total Amount for selected month:', newsal-netwr UNDER newsal-netwr. FORMAT COLOR OFF. ULINE. ENDAT. ENDLOOP. lin = 1. FREE newsal. ENDFORM. "SELECTION * This Date convertion is must for pick the particular Date from the * -displayed line, and here we are reversing the Date like YYYY/MM/DD * -because to Check or assign the date we need to give in reverse order *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* *& Form DATECON *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM datecon. date2 = sy-lisel(17). SHIFT date2 LEFT BY 4 PLACES. WHILE date2 <> ''. SHIFT date2 RIGHT. date4 = date2+11. IF date4 <> '.'. CONCATENATE date4 date3 INTO date3. ENDIF. ENDWHILE. date5 = date3(2). date6 = date3+2. date3 = date3+4. CONCATENATE date3 date6 date5 INTO date3. dat = date3. * SORT dat BY dat. * DELETE ADJACENT DUPLICATES FROM dat COMPARING dat. ENDFORM. "DATECON * Here we are doing different kinds of selections by the EndUser's needs *&---------When user selectiong an Sales Organisation-----------------* *& Form ORGANISATION *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM organisation. SELECT f~vbeln p~matnr c~netwr c~waerk p~audat INTO (sal-vbeln, sal-matnr, sal-netwr,sal-waerk, sal-dat) FROM ( vakpa AS f INNER JOIN vbak AS c ON f~vbeln = c~vbeln ) INNER JOIN vapma AS p ON

f~vbeln = p~vbeln WHERE APPEND sal. ENDSELECT. ENDFORM.

p~audat IN date AND p~vkorg = vkorg. "ORGANISATION

*&---------Without Sales Organisation i.e All Organisation------------* *& Form ORGANISATION_ELSE *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM organisation_else. SELECT f~vbeln p~matnr c~netwr c~waerk p~audat INTO (sal-vbeln, sal-matnr, sal-netwr,sal-waerk, sal-dat) FROM ( vakpa AS f INNER JOIN vbak AS c ON f~vbeln = c~vbeln ) INNER JOIN vapma AS p ON f~vbeln = p~vbeln WHERE p~audat IN date. APPEND sal. ENDSELECT. ENDFORM.

"ORGANISATION_ELSE

*&------------When Selecting Customer by choosing CheckBox------------* *& Form CUS_ORGA *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM cus_orga. SELECT f~vbeln p~matnr c~netwr c~waerk p~audat INTO (sal-vbeln, sal-matnr, sal-netwr,sal-waerk, sal-dat) FROM ( vakpa AS f INNER JOIN vbak AS c ON f~vbeln = c~vbeln ) INNER JOIN vapma AS p ON f~vbeln = p~vbeln WHERE p~audat IN date AND p~vkorg = vkorg AND p~kunnr = kunnr1. APPEND sal. ENDSELECT. ENDFORM.

"CUS_ORGA

*&------------Without Customer by without choosing CheckBox-----------* *& Form CUS_ORGA_ELSE *&--------------------------------------------------------------------* * text *---------------------------------------------------------------------* FORM cus_orga_else. SELECT f~vbeln p~matnr c~netwr c~waerk p~audat INTO (sal-vbeln, sal-matnr, sal-netwr,sal-waerk, sal-dat) FROM ( vakpa AS f INNER JOIN vbak AS c ON f~vbeln = c~vbeln ) INNER JOIN vapma AS p ON f~vbeln = p~vbeln WHERE p~audat IN date AND p~kunnr = kunnr1. APPEND sal. ENDSELECT.

By Chellavelu .V - chella.velu@gmail.com

How To Maintain Output Types in SD

When I am creating a bill and saving it and then giving issue output to and then header preview, the system does not respond. Should I maintain condition records? Where and how to maintain? For getting any output either by print, Fax, or any media you have to do output determination. output determination is also carried by Condition techniques. The detail procedure for Output Determination is : OutPut Determintaion : Output is a form of media from your business to one of its business partners or it can be within the organization. The output can be sent to any of the partners defined in the document. Outputs are usually in the form of Order Confirmations, Freight List, Delivery Notes, Invoices & Shipping Notifications. Determining form of output is output determination. Types of Output: Print Output, Fax, Telex, E-Mail & EDI (Electronic Data Interchange) --> PRINT OUTPUT: Configuration path: ( following are the steps) 1) SPRO-> IMG-> Basic Functions-> Output Control-> Output Determination-> Output Determination using Condition Technique- >Output Determination for Sales Documents (or you can use output determination for billing documents depending on your requirement). 2) Create Condition Table: select the field Sales Doc Type from field catalog & Save 3) Maintain Access Sequence: 4-digits code & description. 4) Assign condition table to access sequence. Select Accesses line item and Go To Fields. Fields will display the fields we have selected in the condition table i.e. sales doc type. Maintain Output Types: AF00: Inquiry AN00: Quotation BA00: Order Confirmation LD00: Delivery RD00: Invoice Select BA00 & Copy & Rename. Give the same 4-digit code as given to access sequence. You Can Maintain: Languages of Output Partners (to whom you need to send output) Print Program- print specification Sap Script- layout Assign Output Types to Partner Functions: go to new entries & assign your output type to partner functions.

Logistics Execution . Customer. It contains: Sales Orgnisation. condition type and leave requirement and manual only columns as blank. Select document type and click on Communication. language.Deliveries .Execute . Select the procedure.Define Reasons for Blocking in Shipping Here select the delivery block that is blocking your order/delivery.Shipping . you can explicitly specify a recipient that will override the standard partner. Time & Language. go to Control Data. In this field. Mention partner function. Output device: LP01. Spool request Name: SD_003. time. medium. Partner Function (abbreviation).code VV31) Can we get the print if the order /delivery is blocked after static credit limit check? Please follow the below path: IMG . time.e. Partner Function Abbreviation. Medium.} Order Type: Document Type. Suffix 2: order_confir & flag on print immediately. Create Condition Records: VV11. Partner Function (The abbreviated form of the name that identifies the Partner) (During output determination. Once you press enter you will come across 2 key combinations: Sales organisation/ Customer Number: fill SO. Display View "Deliveries: Blocking Reasons/Criteria": Overview DB Delivery block descr Order Conf. 01 Credit limit 02 Political reasons 03 Bottleneck material 04 Export papers missng 05 Check free of ch.dlv Print DDueList SpK SpW . Time & Language. Medium. Path For Output Determination For Sales Documents: Logistics -> Sales/distribution -> Master data -> Output -> Sales Document -> Create (t-code VV11) Path for Output Determination for Delivery Documents : Logistics -> Sales/distribution -> Master data -> Output -> shipping -> Create ( t-ode VV21) Path for Output Determination for Billing Documents : Logistics -> Sales/distribution -> Master data -> Output -> Billing Document -> Create ( t. There must also be a master record for the partner that is specified explicitly. the system determines the recipient of the output from the master record for the specified partner function.Define Reasons for Blocking in Shipping . Here mention the output type i. Determination Rule: link the 6-digit procedure code to doc types. Partner. Partner to whom the output should be sent.). medium. Go to new entries and create your own 6-digit code with description. and uncheck if the option Print is checked.Maintain Output Determination Procedure: V10000 (Standard Procedure). Customer No.

Excise Duty plays a vital role in manufacturing cenario’s. and state: .Which taxes the registration covers (additional excise duty.JINFAC (Sales from manufacturing plants) . . CIN Configuration is a topic in itself.JINDEP (Sales from depots) . specifying a four-character code for each Excise Registration Ids In this activity. you may want to block the printing of order confirmations.06 No printing 07 Quantity Change 08 Kanban Delivery Printing block field: Indicates whether the system automatically blocks output for sales documents that are blocked for delivery. Excise related configuration is known as CIN configuration. We have to assign the routine 2 to sales order output types and 3 routine to delivery output types to restrict from output if the docuement exceeds by credit limit. . it will be understood better) Country Version India comes with four pricing procedures as follows: . SAP SD CIN Configuration By Shesagiri What is CIN? CIN Means Country India Version In Indian Taxing procedure.General > Tax on Goods Movement > India > Basic Settings > Maintain Excise Registrations In this IMG activity. Note: The particular output that is affected by a delivery block is determined in output control. special excise duty. PS: If the document is exceeds by the credit limit output type will not determine and as well as we should not give the output type in sales order. You create one ID for each of your business's excise registrations.Enter each of your excise registrations. you maintain excise registration IDs. Example : In the case of sales orders that are blocked for delivery because of credit reasons. but if you check on screen. Some info on CIN Configuration (it may not appear as understandable below.JINEXP (Export sales) . and cess) Fields for any taxes that are not covered will be hidden in transactions involving excise duty.For each excise registration in your business create a registration ID. . you maintain the data relating to your excise registrations.JINSTK (Stock transfers CIN: IMG > Logistics .

These duties are in addition to basic excise duty and special excise duty.The maximum number of items to be printed on each excise invoice . In this IMG activity. .This information is used when you create an excise invoice in Sales and Distribution (SD) for factory sales and for other movements. Similarly for SED CESS Number of Items in Excise Invoice Shows the maximum number of line items that the authorities allow per excise invoice.Excise year start month.Whether you are allowed partial CENVAT credits Maintain Registration ID NUMBER. Maintain Company Code Settings. It posts the deductible duty to the appropriate CENVAT account.When you post a goods receipt. It provides the flexibility to the user to enter the debit account of his choice depending on the nature of transaction. Excise register set description: Description of the excise registers set. The month 04 is entered here indicating April of the calendar year as the start month for excise invoices. excise registration number ECC Number: Specifies the organization's ECC number. Dependencies . The calendar month marking the beginning of the excise year. This start month represents the month for the start of the excise invoice number range. These are livable under the additional duties of excise act. Automatic balance Indicator . AED usage Additional Excise duty Percentage. It controls. Every entity with an excise registration number is required to keep its own excise books. This information is also shown when you post the vendor's excise invoice. Example . Excise Collectorate: The code of the excise collectorate in whose area the excise registration is located. Indicator for providing debit account overwriting Debit Account Overwrite Indicator.. the system splits the input excise duty on the material into its deductible and nondeductible amounts. Use In excise journal voucher transaction. Indicator for confirming. Excise Registration Number: A number assigned to each premises or location that has registered as a manufacturer with the excise authorities. Excise code number. Excise Division: Specifies the excise division in whose area the excise registration is located. This information is used to split the transfer postings' items into multiple subcontracting challans. Any change by the Excise authorities regarding start month should be taken care of by an entry in this field and initialization.Indicates debit accounts can be overwritten. Document Type for CENVAT Postings. Partial CENVAT Credit: Indicates that the excise registration ID is allowed to credit only a portion of its input excise duty to its CENVAT account Dependencies . and adds the nondeductible duty to the material value. X . Excise range: Specifies the excise range in whose area the excise registration is located. which document type the system uses when making CENVAT postings in Financial Accounting (FI). tobacco and sugar. Here ED is document type for cenvat posting. you maintain the data relating to your company codes.Additional Excise duty is livable in case of textile products.

When you are creating an Excise invoice for export sales then the exchange rate for duty calculation will be picked up using this Exchange rate type. to immediately post half of the input excise duty to the appropriate CENVAT accounts.You enter the exchange rate type to store different exchange rates. Days to be considered for excise invoice selection Number of days from document date for excise invoice selection. and the bank buying and selling rates for valuation of foreign currency amounts. you maintain excise information relating to your plants. The rest is posted the CENVAT on hold account. The rounding is done at the item level for each item where the amount is greater than 1 Rupee. CVD Clearing Account . or average rate for translating foreign currency amounts.Specify whether it is a manufacturing site or a depot. . selling rate. Example .Instructs the system. You can use the average rate for the currency translation. Example . Number of excise invoices to be selected Indicates the number of excise invoices that needs to be selected in the excise invoice selection.In this IMG activity.Specifies which G/L account the system credits when you take a CENVAT credit on countervailing duty in the Incoming Excise Invoices transaction. The excise invoice selection will show the related invoices only for the period 08-03-97 to 28-03-97. Maintain Plant Settings .If the value of this field is 20 and today is 28-03-97. This will not round off the CENVAT credit to be taken. Indicator for item level excise duty round off . Immediate Credit on Capital Goods . To indicate the method opted by the company for selecting the excise invoice.You can round off the Excise amount to be paid during an outgoing Excise invoice by marking this indicator as 'X'. . If marked 'X' then the excise duty amount will be rounded off to the nearest rupee at the Purchase order level. Exchange rate type .This indicator is to be used for deciding whether Item level excise duty amount rounding off is required during procurement cycle.You can use the exchange rate type to define a buying rate. It can be either earliest or latest invoices that were received. For each plant: .Excise invoice selection procedure :Excise invoice selection type.Key representing a type of exchange rate in the system. If the duty amount is less than one rupee then no rounding is done Rounding off of Excise duty for outgoing excise invoice . Plant Settings . for use in the following year. Document type for TDS FI posting: Financial accounting document type for TDS posting. you maintain excise information relating to your plants. Exchange rate type to be used for Export excise duty converts . when you verify a goods receipt for capital goods. Document type for FI posting on Utilisation Financial accounting document type for TDS posting.In this activity.

If you receive multiple GR's for a given Excise challan and would like to avail multiple credit mark the GRs per EI as 'Multiple GR's for one excise invoice. Create one excise group for each set of registers that you need to keep. 'Create Part1 for STO' when marked will create a Part1 during the receipt of material through inter plant transfers. This will post the selected records into RG23D automatically. . Alternatively if you want to availa the credit only after all the goods receipts have been made mark it as ' Multiple GR for one excise invoice. you can also control how various excise invoice transactions will work.Multiple GR for one excise invoice. For each excise group.In this activity.Under normal circumstances. 7.. The RG 23A.Indicates that the plant in question is a depot. 'Automatic posting' when ticked will post the Excise invoice other movements automatically along with creation in single step. single credit'. multiple books can be maintained. multiple credit'. Depot . excise authorities require every business to maintain only one set of excise registers and one set of accounts. If the indicator 'Folio no create' is marked system will generate Folio numbers for RG23D during receipt of excise invoice into depot. 3. If the indicator 'Default GR qty' is marked system will default the Excise challan quantity on to the Goods receipt if the Excise invoice number is given in the pop-up. 11.Depots are required to prepare register RG 23D.In this IMG activity. 2. Maintain whether this Excise group is for a depot or not. If your company has only one set of excise registers. if required. . multiple credit Maintain Excise Groups . 1. During depot sales if you do not want to do RG23D selection and posting separately and would like to complete RG23D selection in one step mark the indicator 'RG23D Auto post'. Excise Group Governs which set of excise registers a business transaction will be included in. An excise group allows you to maintain a separate set of excise registers and excise accounts. you define your excise groups.You can assign the same ID to more than one plant. If you want to automatically create Excise invoice during Sales cycle at the time of billing the tick the indicator 'Create EI' 5.Assign it an excise registration ID. . and follow different procedures for goods receipt and invoice generation. RG 23C and PLA serial numbers are created for an excise group.Number of goods receipt per excise invoice. 8. Excise Groups . Recommendation . Assign the excise groups to plants. 9. You cannot cancel the selection later. 'Create Part1 for Block Stock' when marked will create a Part1 during the receipt of material into Blocked stock . Single credit . 4.Multiple GR for one excise invoice. 6. you define excise groups. . then you need to maintain only one excise group. But through exemption from the authorities. . If you receive only one consignment for an Excise challan then you can leave GR's per EI as blank. 10. 'Create Part1 for consumption stock' when marked will create a Part1 during the receipt of material into consumption stock.

Consignment stock Maintain Series Group . in transactions involving excise duty. Then.If no financial postings are required for an Excise invoice in this seris group then you tick the 'No utilization' indicator.Series Group Determination. Indicates that the plant in question is a depot. Default excise qty in GR .Multiple GR for one excise invoice . You need not separately Post the excise invoice Also we can set indicator for creation of part 1 for: .Instructs the system to automatically create a Sales and Distribution (SD) excise invoice immediately you create a commercial invoice or a pro forma invoice.If the CENVAT has to be paid immediately and you need not wait for the Fort nightly . for example.Following is the relation between excise group. . .If this indicator is ticked then while doing Goods Receipt using 'MB01' system will default the excise invoice quantity on to the Goods receipt document. you specify which excise group you are using. If you need automatic posting of RG23D selection then the Post Goods Issue should have been completed before running RG23D selection. But each of these series has to be declared to the excise authorities.Assign series group to excise registration ID . Folio number for depo Posting .Define excise series groups based on type of outgoing document .Blocked stock . .If you want to make use of this function. Based on excise regulations and exemptions from the authorities you can maintain multiple number series for outgoing documents.Multiple GR for one excise invoice .In this IMG activity.If this indicator is marked then while creating Excise invoice for other movements system automatically does the Verify and Post. Series groups allow you to maintain multiple number ranges for the outgoing excise documents. . you create different sets for each excise group.Depots are required to prepare register RG 23D. and follow different procedures for goods receipt and invoice generation.GR Per Excise Invoice . Single Credit Create Excise Invoice Automatically . by choosing Excise Group . This information tells the system which G/L accounts to post the excise to. . plant and registration. excise group. . At the end of the period.Stock transport order . Multiple credit . and series groups in Customizing for Sales and Distribution (SD). The excise invoice is created in the background. you must also define the default plant. RG23D Sales Creation and posting option . you define the different excise series groups within your company. when you post a vendor's excise invoice. when you come to prepare your excise registers. If this is not selected then you need to separately do RG23D selection followed by PGI and then RG23D verification and posting.RG23D Automatic Option if selected will create Depot excise invoice by posting the selection of excise invoices in single step.In define excise groups in Customizing.

In this IMG activity. the account determination within CIN IMG should point to the ED interim account. If the flag is checked then system will create an Excise invoice in the given Series group but there will not be any account postings or Part2 postings. and group 002 for 57 F4 documents. use a copy of the tax procedure TAXINN. .Specify the purchasing and sales conditions types used for basic excise duty.You could define two series groups.General > Tax On Goods Movement > India > Basic Settings > Determination of Excise Duty > Select Tax Calculation Procedure In this IMG activity.Enter the tax procedure and the pricing conditions that are relevant for excise tax processing. you maintain the excise duty indicators. and cess. Such invoices will not be listed for fortnightly utilization. you define which tax procedure and pricing condition types are used in calculating excise taxes using formula-based excise determination. use a copy of the tax procedure TAXINJ. . fill out the CVD cond. . If you have both fortnightly and immediate utilization for the same excise group. Note that once you have started using a tax procedure. you specify which tax procedure you want to use for determining excise duties and sales taxes on input materials in India. additional excise duty. If you use formula-based excise determination. This tax procedure also supports condition-based excise determination.No account postings for CENVAT in sales cycle .payment then mark the 'Immediate Utilization' Iindicator. otherwise you will not be able to display old documents.In this IMG activity. . the system immediately pays the amount from CENVAT and creates the Part II entry.Specifies that when you create an excise invoice. Example . Maintain Excise Defaults . Immediate Utilization of CENVAT . If you use condition-based excise determination. .Specify the conditions in the sales order that are used for excise rates. IMG > Logistics .No utilization Flag If you do not need any CENVAT utilization for an excise invoice but would like to just generate an excise invoice then you need to mark this indicator. you cannot switch to another one. Account determination for immediate payment will be done exactly the same as being done for fortnightly utilization program. field and leave all the others blank. Maintain Excise Duty Indicators . so that you can work with both concurrently. . special excise duty.If you use condition-based excise determination. group 001 for excise invoices. fill out all of the fields as follows: .Specify the countervailing duty condition type used for import purchase orders. We strongly recommend that new customers use condition-based excise determination. .If you use formula-based excise determination.

IMG > Logistics .See also : SAP Library -> Logistics -> Country Versions -> Asia-Pacific -> India -> Materials Management (MM) -> Condition-Based Excise Determination and -> Formula-Based Excise Determination. plant. Master Data ." So. Creating Condition Records for Excise Duty 1.In the Tax Code field. by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements Account -> Excise Duties Using Condition Technique and …-> Settings Determination. Select the combination of objects that you want to create the condition record for. The system then calculates the excise duties using the condition records you have created. 6. 5.When you enter a purchase order or other purchasing document. The Key Combination dialog box appears. enter the tax code for condition-based excise determination in each line item. a purchase order. Features : The standard system comes with two tax calculation procedures. Enter data as required. and enter the tax code for condition-based excise determination in each. to create a condition record for a tax that applies to a combination of country. the system applies the excise duty at the rates you have entered in the condition records. such as which vendor you purchase a material from. In the command field. Both tax procedures contain condition types that cover all of the excise duties and sales taxes applicable. These activities include one activity where you define a tax code for condition-based excise determination. you post the goods receipt and the excise invoice. Choose . 2. and chapter ID. Since the exact rates of excise duty can vary on a large number of factors. . enter FV11 and choose . you create condition records for every sort of excise duty.Create condition records for all excise duties that apply. Control Code means "chapter ID. or which chapter ID the vendor stocks the material under. Enter the condition type that you want to create a condition record for and choose . Save the condition record. . for example. TAXINN is only supports condition-based excise determination. When you come to enter a purchasing document. select Country/Plant/Control Code. Day-to-Day Activities . 3. Customizing : Make the settings in Customizing Basic -> India -> for Logistics – General. On the dialog box. 4. enter the dummy tax code that you have defined. The system posts the excise duty to the appropriate accounts for deductible input taxes when you enter the excise invoice.General > Tax On Goods Movement > India > Basic Settings > Determination of Excise Duty > Condition-Based Excise Determination When you enter a purchasing document. When the ordered materials arrive. whereas TAXINJ supports condition-based excise determination and formula-based excise determination. for example. the R/3 System automatically calculates the applicable excise duties using the condition technique.

You can use the same indicator for all the plants with the same excise status from a legal point of view.01 under status 7. 4. If your business only qualifies for partial CENVAT credit.Plant master data You assign each of your plants an excise duty indicator.Customer master data Similarly.Excise tax rate For every chapter ID and final excise duty indicator.When you execute a business transaction involving materials that are subject to excise duty. Let us consider an example to illustrate how the system determines which rate of excise duty to apply to a material. Looks up the customer master data to see what status you have assigned the customer.01.Vendor master data For each of your vendors with the same excise status from a legal perspective. you must have maintained all the data on the Excise Rate Maintenance screen.Material master data Each material is assigned a chapter ID. Assume you are posting a sale of ball bearings to a customer. . 2. . you must customize your system accordingly. for each permutation of plant indicator and customer indicator. .Formula-Based Excise Determination . the system looks up the table under Excise Tax Rate to see what rate of duty applies to chapter ID 1000. such as all those that are in an exempt zone. Looks up the plant master data to see what status you have assigned the plant. the system automatically calculates the duty for you. Similarly. The system looks up the table under Excise Indicator for Plant and Customer to see what the final excise duty indicator is for customer status 3 and plant status 2: It is 7. In order for the system to be able to determine which rate of excise duty to apply. Again. you then create a final excise duty indicator. Finally. your plant has status 2. Let’s assume the chapter ID at plant for the ball bearings is 1000. Let's assume you've assigned the customer status 3. The system automatically determines the rate of excise duty as follows: 1. whether the vendor is a manufacturer. See also the information about manufacturers that are only entitled to deduct a certain portion of the duty (see Partial CENVAT Credit). The system determines the chapter ID of the ball bearing for the plant. or a first-stage dealer. you assign the same excise duty indicator to each of your customers that share the same legal excise status. a depot. which you can Master Data®access from the SAP Easy Access screen by choosing Indirect Taxes Excise Rate Maintenance. . You must also stipulate if the vendor qualifies as a small-scale industry. For each permutation of plant indicator and vendor indicator. 3. You must also specify the vendor type – for example. You maintain the following types of data: . 5. you maintain the rate of excise duty. you define an excise duty indicator. . you then create a final excise duty indicator.

IMG > Logistics . the system determines the various excise duties in the excise invoice using the information that you have entered here. you specify which condition types you use for which sort of tax.VS1 (basic excise duty) .In this IMG activity.MWS (central sales tax) .In this IMG activity.For taxes on purchases.Create a new tax code. Enter all the accounts that are affected by each transaction type. or when you create an outgoing excise invoice from a sales order.For taxes on sales. when you create a purchasing document. Note that this only applies to condition types that you use with the new excise determination method.ESE (service tax expense) Specify Excise Accounts per Excise Transaction .MW3 (local sales tax) .General > Tax On Goods Movement > India > Account Determination Define G/L Accounts for Taxes . enter the accounts for each sub transaction type as well. . you define a tax code for the purposes of calculating excise duty when you enter purchasing documents. Use these settings as a basis for your own.VS5 (sales tax setoff) .VS2 (additional excise duty) .In this IMG activity. and VS3 are used as clearing accounts during excise invoice verification. Classify Condition Types .Define Tax Code for Purchasing Documents .Assign an account to each of the following posting keys.In this IMG activity. Requirements .VS3 (special excise duty) . and set the tax code type to V (input tax). Do not make any other settings for it. For example.You have set up G/L accounts for each of the processing keys listed below. when you enter an incoming excise invoice from a purchase order. use the condition types contained in the pricing procedures. . The system uses this information when you create a document from another one. Only carry out this activity if you use condition-based excise determination. . .ESA (service tax) . assign the tax code for purchasing documents to the company codes where it will be used. use the condition types contained in the tax procedure.Assign Tax Code to Company Codes In this IMG activity. . . the system only uses the condition types that you enter here. The accounts for VS1. you specify which G/L accounts you will use to record which taxes. . Only carry out this activity if you use condition-based excise determination. The standard system comes with sample settings for the tax calculation procedures and pricing procedures. If you use sub transaction types. VS2. you specify which excise accounts (for excise duty and CENVAT) are to be posted to for the various transaction types. In addition.

a small configuration step has to be made in Screen Sequences for Material Master.Chart of accounts Furthermore. EWPO.Excise TT DC ind Account name .SAPLMGD1. you assign the excise and CENVAT accounts to G/L accounts. 2205.e.Transaction type UTLZ is used for determining accounts only while posting excise JVs and also if the payment of excise duty has to be done fortnightly. Following document helps you to do this configuration. 15.e. Even though this functionality is available in enterprise version. which is “Foreign Trade: Import Data”. 21-15-6 . one set of accounts will suffice for all transactions. Once the data screens are exhibited. For most businesses.For each excise group. ie.Material Master à Logistics General 1. Select the same and click on Sub screens in the left frame. SSq. Go to the last sub screen i.Defined the excise groups . Note : you need not remit the CENVAT to the excise department immediately. the system determines which G/L accounts to post to by looking at the: . Now in the last sub screen i. When you come to execute the various transactions. The fortnightly CENVAT payment utility picks up the credit side accounts from the transaction types of GRPO.Excise group . if you want separate account determination settings within an excise group. 2. Config setting needed to be done in order to get the Excise Details Screen in Material Master. select data screen no. . Go to IMG Define Structure of Data Screen for each Configuring the Material master Screen Sequence. .Maintained the transaction accounts Activities . 5. you can also use sub transaction types. Click on tab view sub screen and ensure that the sub screen is blank. Example: .Defined the G/L accounts . Usually it would be 21. Select your screen sequence.Company code .GRPO DR CENVAT on hld account Specify G/L Accounts per Excise Transaction . 3.In this IMG activity. so maintain the credit account for transaction type DLFC as an excise duty interim account.0001 and select the same. 21and Scrn 15.GRPO CR RG 23 BED account .6 you delete SAPLMGD1 – 0001 and instead add SAPLJ1I_MATERIAL_MASTER and in the screen no. This will be set off when you remit the duty. assign the excise and CENVAT accounts to G/L accounts. and TR6C for determining the CENVAT and PLA accounts. There is no separate transaction type for fortnightly payment.GRPO CR CENVAT clearing account . Select the same and click on Data Screen in the left frame. Requirements You have already: . 4. no.

You can assign a sales person to a sales group in the personnel master record.plant/division (if the accounts are to be posted according to products) The business area is defined in Customizing for Sales. The system posts costs and revenue according to the business area. 7. Individual personnel master records are used to manage data about salespersons. Sales Group. its organization units and how they are related. The staff of a sales office may be subdivided into sales groups. Which three organizational elements make up a sales area and briefly explain their function? Sales organization: An organizational unit that sells and distributes products.sales area (if the accounts are to be posted according to sales) . Name the three internal organizational elements within a sales organization and briefly explain their function. for example. Division: Product groups can be defined for a wide-ranging spectrum of products. the sales office must be assigned to that area. What does the term "business area" refer to and how can it be used? Business Area. grouping product and market combinations as homogeneously as possible for the purpose of developing unified business policy. partial deliveries. Geographical aspects of the organization in business development and sales are defined using the term sales office. Sales offices are assigned to sales areas. You can assign a distribution channel to one or more sales organizations. Excise related sub screen appears. SD Questions on Corporate Structure In R/3 you can represent a company's structure by defining and assigning corporate structure elements. A sales office can be considered as a subsidiary. Within a division you can carry out statistical analyses or set up separate marketing. retail and direct sales. A unit in an enterprise. Sales Office. sales groups can be defined for individual divisions. Typical distribution channels include wholesale. For every division you can make customer-specific agreements on. Salespersons. and is responsible for these transactions. Save the setting. Distribution channel: Channel through which salable materials or services reach customers. The business area can be equivalent to the: . o Business area. pricing and terms of payment. SD. For example. . This structure forms a framework in which all business transactions can be processed. A combined structure can be created from the point of view of accounting. Create a Material Master and check whether in Screen Foreign Trade – Import. Chart showing the organizational structure of an enterprise. MM. negotiates terms of sale.6. If you enter a sales order for a sales office within a certain sales area. What is the purpose of doing that? Enterprise organization diagram.

Many to Many to One. Shipping Point: Organizational unit at a fixed location that carries out shipping activities. Many to Many. be a company's mail department or a plant's rail depot. serving to subdivide an enterprise according to production. procurement.o Financial Accounting (FI). Organizational unit in an organization that specifies and checks credit limits for customers. Can one business area be assigned to several company codes? Which (sub) module of SAP could make business areas obsolete? Yes in CO . maintenance. Classification: Business object Structure: A plant can assume a variety of roles: As a maintenance plant. Give a definition of plant (in SAP). the plant is the organizational unit for material valuation. it makes merchandise available for distribution and sale. As a rule. The preferred shipping point for a plant is defined as the default shipping point. A business area is an organizational unit within financial accounting which represents a separate area of operations or responsibilities within an organization. Financial accounting transactions can be allocated to a specific business area. Explain the relationship between sales organizations and plants. A credit control area can include one or more company codes. A shipping point could. Which organizational element is central in shipping? Give a definition of it. Many to One. What is the central organizational element in purchasing? Purchasing Organization. Explain the relationship between sales organizations. . Organizational unit within Logistics. which depends on the shipping condition and the loading condition. The maintenance tasks that are to be performed are specified within a maintenance planning plant. What is a credit control area? What relationship exists between credit control areas and company codes? Credit control area. plants and company codes. Each delivery is processed by only one shipping point. It is not possible to assign a company code to more than one credit control areas. As a retail or wholesale site. A plant is a place where either materials are produced or goods and services provided. for example. Briefly explain the relationship between sales organizations and company codes. and materials planning aspects. it includes the maintenance objects that are spatially located within this plant.

How many shipping points can you assign to a plant? Many. M: Plant PP: Plant FI: Company Code CO: Controlling Area Can you further subdivide a plant? If yes into what? A plant can be subdivided into storage locations. . location and materials planning aspects). allowing stocks of materials to be broken down according to predefined criteria (e.g. Which agreement type I should consider. He is only concerned with totat sales in kiloleter(Quantity). because here client is not offering rebate on Sales volume in rupees or dollar.CO? SD: Sales Organizations. A plant can be subdivided into locations and operational areas.For the placement of materials in storage (stock put-away). MM.PP. material rebate(0002) or Rebate on the basis of sales volume(0005). As per rebate agreement concern rebate is offered in percentage.FI. a storage location is assigned to a plant. whereas subdivision into operational areas reflects responsibilities for production. Short SAP SD Questions 1 Rebate Agreement 1. Subdivision into locations takes geographical criteria into account. If you have a warehouse management system active. is this custmer rebate(0003). What are the highest organizational units in SD. Can a sales organization sell from a plant belonging to a different company code? Yes. Please guide me for my scenario. How many shipping points can you assign to a sales organization? None. to what would you assign the warehouse number? Plant & Storage Location. The storage location depends on the storage condition and the stock placement situation. a valuation area corresponds to a plant. As a rule. The business area that is responsible for a valuation area is determined as a function of the division.. Can you assign two different sales organization to the same company code? Yes. To what do you assign distribution channels and divisions? Sales Organizations.

sales group. 3. Transportation zone. reco account.Company data . Customer master is basically divided into 3 tabs.Billing data . export data. sales office. account management.Sales product attributes.General master details. For each customer you can create scale based conditions (under the heading tab :Scales).payment terms. Region.If your distributors are fewer (far less than 900 materials) then you should go for only customer rebate. . For Account purpose FD01/FD02/FD03 etc 2.Shipping data . customer pricing procedure. Customer Master How to create the customer master? The following are the T-codes for central creation of customer master. .Partner functions.Sales data .General . etc. 2. click it add how many customers you want. . .) Change Customer Account Group Customer master mass maintenance Maintain Number Ranges (Customer) You need to identify various parameters within each Account group based on which the reco account is identified within the customer master. insurance etc. Sales purpose XD01/XD02/XD03 etc. Cust. No need to create condition record for every material if you create customer rebate. When creating customer rebates (T:VB01) select customer rebate. . Is it necesary to maintain condition record for every material and every customer defining the scale? Because in this scennario client is going for incentives scheme for each material and each customer (distrbutor). 3. XD01 XD02 XD03 XD04 XD05 XD06 XD07 XD99 XDN1 Create Customer (Centrally) Change Customer (Centrally) Display Customer (Centrally) Customer Changes (Centrally) Block customer (centrally) Mark customer for deletion (centr. Guide me for conditions types and scale basis for maintaining condition records. You can create a customer based on 3 views: 1. Statistical grp. Juristiction codes. Centrally VD01/VD02/VD03 etc. there you will see a header tab: Conditions .

2. The Item Usage and Higher Level Item Category decide about the Item Category in a sales doc.credit control area What are sales area and its components? Sales area consists of Sales Organisation. Distribution Channel and Division. Master data. has it anything to do with cumulative condn.. Org structure: Relation between Company . Short SAP SD Questions 2 1. How can we know whether the customer is one-time or regular? One can maintain Account Group for One-time customers. What is cut over strategy? Cutover strategy depends upon how the organizations design their data load strategies.Sales org One-to-Many Sales Org . There's no thumb rule. Some stock comes into your plant/storage location as return and some stock is actually delivered to your customer through sales orders of various kinds.Plants & company vs. Item Category Group is one of the component which along with the Sales Doc Type. Plants Company . the strategy for loading should be crystal clear.What is the Function of item category and item category group? Item Category determines the processing of any Item/material that we enter in a sales order and in this way it also effects the procesing of any sales doc in which it is used. Records? . What happens when you do not enter a value for a manual and mandatory condition type? The pricing procedure will reject the conditions in the sales order 3. from which the current system will be migrated to SAP system 6. But stock being a highly dynamic quantity.sales org . The stock data as on the date of going live should be correctly entered. 7."condition update" during configuration for a condition type (at v/06). Then you have to load all the back dated transaction on the stock. By which we can identify onetime customers.. 5. What are Cumulative Condition Records? There is a field:. Do header condition type have an access sequence? No 4. Transaction data which follows whom and then you make a copy of the system as a Production system a day before and after checking the successful data loads. you go-live 100% or partial again depending upon organizational setup and policies. Cutover planning is highly site specific. you decide the sequence of Data loads for Configuration settings. What are legacy systems? The Existing system on which current system is working. Normally.

In Access Sequence. It should have the same Ship to Party. 13. What triggers the automatic creation of PR or PO in case of third party sales? In item category we can set "automatic PO" so that PO and PR will automatically generate after saving the order. What is the importance of requirment field in access sequence? System will not go to asscess condition type system will reply through formula. What is z transaction? We copied standard TC or object and rename it by Z its basically stnd name which will start from Z (User defined) 14. etc. you can assign whichever tables and fields are required. it will try to get available data from the first. 10. What happens in the access sequence when you put all the ticks in the exclusive field? When you put tick in exclusive field of all access sequences. You never change the item category configuration to "automatic PO". SAP SD Tips by : Moyin 11.8. What is meant by delivery group? Delivery Group is basically grouping all individual deliveries for Billing.? I need an example or a task no. Shipping Point. 15. 16. IF you have 3 different access sequences for one condition record then in a pricing procedure in what hierarchy will you maintain the three accesses? In Condition Records (T Code VK11). will it move on to the next one. data is not available.Evilboy 12. you cannot have one condition record for 3 access sequences. So in my opinion. Short SAP SD Questions 3 1. Can you create sales order for 40 items if the quotation is sent for 30 items? Yes. 9. . What makes the immediate delivery in cash sales? Order type immediate delivery switch on. Only in case. What is change request and task? What was your task no. It is the schedule line category type which triggers the automatic PR creation. Now one Condition Type can be assigned to one access sequence. in my opinion. you would be putting values to corresponding Condition Types. What are the steps that are required to include sales person as a partner function in the partner determination? Partner function sales represenative or person responsible these two we can add through partner funtion in partner procedure. that is being used in your project to clear few things in my mind? .

The system will automatically pop with the change request pop box . Generally before starting the implementation the entire organization structure and the organizational elements are freezed and a skeleton structure is prepared and then along with BPO's requirements the system is 1st configured and then the customization is started to suit the Clients specified requirements. Generally the requirements would be coming from the BPO's (Business Process Owners) who will deputed for each module e. material master.g.g. The task which you have mentioned in your question is nothing but the what task you have performed while customizing the client system and the heading name which have given it for that task and generated a request for that task.:.SD. e. PP QM FI) by the client as they would be expert in their areas and module who under the business processes as they clients Project Team members.Golden Master Server (Quality cum Testing Server) . (e. .:-take a company called ABC which is implementing SAP. Now when you want to release the request you have to use the T-code SE10 where you can see the requests under the heading modifiable or released.VEDK-2785467) VEDKmeans the Clients System name then followed by the system generated request number. Go to the modifiable option. when you are in the project. Few client requirements for customer master. Organization and Transactions. They are whole and sole responsible to get the implementation done and meet the requirements raised by them and the other users from the client’s side. the client is also given a number called client number. Each request will have again an internal request number.g. The system will generate a request number and you save it. First you have to release the internal request and then release the external request number. So the Client is given a number in the following manner by the SAP Implementers at the site 291.Testing Server (the scenarios developed in development server is tested here) 295.Development Sever (With client data of minimum 15 days transactions) 294. 2. What is your client Number in the project? Like how we have 800 for IDES? Generally like IDES client. when you can give request name as defined by the system or can give your own request name with heading of what changes you have made while customization. So while implementing a project The entire implementation is done under phases and in different Client no Servers. This will in turn released by the basis guys thru the T-code SM64 in a group when all the requests are pooled from different users.Sand Box server (Initial Testing scenarios Server) 292. The client requirements may be in the form of customized reports and queries which are supposed to be suited according to their business process.:.Production Server (where the clients live data is stored and daily business transactions are done) 3.checked finally before transferring to production server 296.The Change Request is that request when you do some thing new in customizing or configuration in the system.

You can then delete the sales order then. . which you can assign in role customizing).D Important Tips for Interview for SAP SD Let me share some important tips for interview for SAP SD: 1.Vaibhav You cannot delete an Invoice. Only after the accounting doc is reversed and/or deleted.Now as far as the transactions are concerned not all the users are allowed to run all the transactions. The latter is more flexible but it is not feasible if you want to place restrictions to a large amount of fields. but with a constraint that no subsequent document is created against it. SAP SD Tips by : Moyin 4. If your projects are in Indian scenario be thorough with CIN/Excise VAT and pricing procedure. you can cancel your invoice. While creating the variant you can place non-changeability ticks on specific fields. the user is given authorization only to run certain transactions depending on the levels and stages in his area of specialization like in SD module the entry level user is only allowed to enter the data like creation of Sales orders or delivery and billing and the next level is give the authorization for changes to be made for that same data that is entered by the entry level users. You also need to check if any TAX documents are generated with your Invoice. Please be through with the projects you have mentioned in your resume. The next higher level -Supervisor is given a few more transaction authorization which will be above these mentioned users) Here the reports are segregated like Higher Management Reports.Ganeshan. or the Plants heads or GM etc. Ask your FI guy to reverse the accounting doc. 3.e. 2. Here the user roles are defined as per the BPO's (i.Make a transaction variant thru SHD0 and assign it to your sales doc. Next allow those users only to work with your transaction variant but not with the original transaction. Middle Management Reports where by again authorization is given those heads(Head of the Depts.You could make use of user-exit FORM USEREXIT_FIELD_MODIFICATION in include MV45AFZZ (via authorization objects.. How can we delete the Sales Orders? How can an invoices be cancelled or deleted? You can very well delete sales order using transaction VA02. Remember all the versions you have worked upon.) to run certain transactions which allow to view reports that are needed daily by the management. . *-. How to restrict users for not changing some fields in T-code va02? There are two ways to do this: . Invoice can be cancelled using T cose VF11 and then you can reverse the Goods Issue using VL09 and making the picking quantity zero in the deivery document and delete the delivery order using VL02n . *-. You can only cancel it with (VF11) if the relevant accounting document is not been generated.Sabir 5. *-.. You need to reverse/delete those documents also.

3. 9. Please be through with your basics. 11. I mean normal. . How the business interaction would be there between the Consultant and Customer? How the Customer Queries were handled successfully sitting from his location. therefore a change request). even telecons and some companies also allow chat. or don't know about something. transportation. Always be strong on SD MM FI integrations What the job responsibilites would be for the Support Consultant? If the Consultant is working in Offshore Support.4 For offshore client specially in Europe and NASA prepare yourself for Warehouse/Lean warehouse 5. Listen to them carefully. (not very tough) 10. if you are not able to understand their question request them to repeat it. Remember your last ticket. Again I should repeat prepare yourself for warehouse. Mug up all the determinations. and say a straight NO if you have not worked on something. which can be incident (routine problems). Business intercation between users and customer can be through mail box utilities. 5. change tickets (need configuration change. The MOST IMPORTANT THING: Do not try to fool your interviewer. because there is always a change advisory board on client end to evaluate and implement the adviced change. Say a straight no when you don't know or have not worked on the topic. Have general awareness about ALE/EDI/IDOC. I mean even general knowledge will help. Speak slow. as this provides added advantage. the pricing and the master data. pls pls pls don't not go for flukes otherwise you will end up in soup. People who are thorough with route. Third party billing / Intercompany / Make to order are important topics. 7. outlook. say exactly and only what is asked do not show your excitement and do not speak too much if you know the topic too well. users and team) 2) good business knowledge 3) are you able to convince the client That comes in next round when you are interviewed to be deputed for any US/Europe project. shipping always have an added advantage. 2. Job responsibility of a Support consultants is to handle routine tickets. in this round take care of the following: 1. normally a support consultant can only advice a change but can't do it . the process. What I understand is most of the companies especially in the US are looking for a candidates with 1) good communication skills (SAP is all about interacting with the client. because usually Indians speak english too fast. rather than assuming it to be something else and giving a wrong reply. 8. 4. 6. Cost booking that is accounting enteries after PGI and Billing should be known to you.

If its big project. and what are the main deifferences between one pricing procedure determination to the others. Team size means the employees who you are working on sap r/3 implementation. For the project completion it will take around 8-10 months to get into golive. if you regularly read the mails in the group you will soon start recognizing tickets. What are the five imp fields to be maintained in account determination 3. partner determination. Hardly the team of the sd will be 4 to 5 and entire team of the project will be around 2024 (all modules like fi/co. Tips by : Nitin What is the team size? Duration of the project.storagelocation determination 2.Usually the customer provides with the number of the document and client/company code and other necessary info. What is meant by transfer of data from legacy code to sap 5. What is purpose of maintaining common distribution channels and common divisions Q. After that supporting it depends as project time line for every company is different. 8. pm). about the process which is facing problem. How to and where to maintain copy controls 11. account determination.Suresh Kumar SAP SD Interview Questions Following are some SD Interview questions that might be asked. sd. pp. What do you do really in pricing determination. which data control these differences 6. it will be around 40. post implementation for 3 months. What is the purpose of shipping point determination not menu path 9. 2. hr. as there is always somebody there to help you". maybe with snapshot if required. What is the purpose of text determination. After that. What type of reports generally a support consultant maintain and report 7. qm. 1. tickets are nothing but the routine incidents the SAP consultants get. the solution is then sent to user.11 . the consultant tracks the project by logging in to development server and search out for causes. For those people who asks for for tickets: 1. How to create excise invoice and what is it 4. And the most important thing "Believe in yourself and God. output determination. *-. What and where types of copy controls we change 10. pls note that most of the problems except for the basic questions discussed in this group are the tickets themselves. What are interfaces used generally an indian organisation which is in retail business and and which is in banking business and oil business. Those who are asking SAP gurus to tell them about tickets. mm. Tickets are normally raised by end user and carry a priority.No.

It prevents the multiplication of master records. You can do it using many tools. Output determination: What kinda output does a sales/delivery/billing document create and who gets it. Coming to the output and the procedure. What it means is you want to transfer all the customer and materials and all other information from Older (legacy system) to new SAP system. who the goods are going to and whatever else you waana drive through this functionality.Common Distribution Channel and Common Divison are maintained so that if any master data like customer or material maintained with respect to one distribution channel can be used in other DCh. Vivek Regarding q-3. storage location determination Text determination: For transferring information from material or customer to order/delvery or invoice (and anything inbetween) Account determination: For transferring financial and costing information to proper financial docs Partner determination: For determing who is is legally resposible for A/r. What are the five imp fields to be maintained in account determination Go to IMG and find out 3. How to create excise invoice and what is it. partner determination. The manufacturing plant is . where?. I've never worked in india so I dunno 4. distribution channel. account determination. As per Indian tax system. I suppose the condition types used will be different and hence the following whole procedure. Rajendra Babu As of what I know answer to question 5 would be: 5. For example A partner might get an EDI notification for a sales order just confirmed.. division). Eg: A customer is created for say sales area 1000/20/00 then the same customer can be used in sales area 1000/30/00 if we maintain 20 as common distribution channel. What is meant by transfer of data from legacy code to sap Legacy Code ? It should be legacy data to SAP.. we determine how the prices are calculated. What is the purpose of text determination. Uday 1. taking into account sales area(sales org.the same for materials also. The main differences between pricing procedures would be the differences as I mentioned above. Excise duty (16%) is payable by each manufacturing unit on the value of manufactured goods / on the value added. document type and customer(generally sold-to-party). Hence no need for extending the customers. whereas a financial/leasing company gets the invoice! 2. most noticeably MDMs. from the point of view of field entries. output determination.

(7) Its not clear. etc) is required. j1i5. Chart of Accounts. Distribution Chanel. The A/P along with Account Keys need to be allocated accordingly with combination of Account Determination Group for Customer and Material if required. (5) Pricing is determined by combination of Sales Organisation. Shipping Point and Storage Conditions (2) Account Determination: Sales View. RG23C. Jitesh 1. it will be Copy Control (Order to Delivery) from OR to LF . (b) Account Determination:is integration between Finance and SD. In general case of Standard Order. extracting and printing excise invoice. (a) Text Determination: Any Texts in Masterial Master/Material Determination/Order/Delivery . etc is meant to convey messages to the subsequent documents for compliance. (e) Storage Location Determination: depends on Plant. (4) Before installation of SAP. (3) I will check and let you know within week. (6) Depends on Customer requirements.g Only One Sold To Party per Customer. Customer Pricing Procedure and Document Pricing Procedure.supposed to submit an excise duty report on fortnightly / monthly basis. At the time of instalation. (d) Output Determination: What type of Output (Fax/Mail. "Give Top Priority" message mentioned in Order is meant for Production Dept. e. j2i5. etc). PLA) are maintained for that purpose. . (9) Copy Control: is basically meant so that Data is copied from preceding Document to subsequent one. we use transaction j1id for configuration and j1iin. More than One Ship to Party/ Bill to Party/ Payer possible.g. Various registers (RG1. (8) So that Shipping Point is determined automatically once the settings for the same are done. Distribution Channel. j2i6. (c) Partner Determination:To identify which type of Partner it is so that if required for same Customer different Partner Functions may be required e. e. LSMW. Division. In SAP. cenvat credit available and cash balance available. Sales Organisation. It can be done in various ways like BDC. Useful for despatch of Material in casae of Ship to Party. j2i7. What subsequent Document is required is to some extent determined by Customer Requirements as well as Document Types. Accordingly different Masters will have to be created. Data maintained by Company is called Legacy Data. it is required to transfer Data from Legacy to SAP like Masters (Material/Customer. sending Bill in case of Bill to Party and payment followup/Dunning in case of Payer.g. which record all the transactions including movement of goods. j1ip for creating. where and in what Format(ABAP Customisation may be required in some cases especially Invoices). RG23A. etc. Account Assignment Group for Customer and Material and Account Keys.

.Handling basic issues of MM module.So that MM can either produce or procure.Review and approval of functional specifications.Monitoring S&D reports on daily basis required by clients .PP. . Availability check is carried out with the help of these checking group and checking rule.Preparing end user training Documents 2. .Setting up configuration for new enhancements.What is ERP and SAP?and why inplementing SAP in an organization? Explain the special features of SAP over other ERPs? SAP is an ERP package.(10) Check for yourself in IMG (Sales Document types and Delivery Document Types) Shailesh What is the difference between the Avaialbility check 01 (Daily requirement) and 02 (Individual Requirement) in material master? 01 and 02 are the checking group.Preparing the functional specification documents.-In this all the requirements in aday or in a wek are processed at a time. *-.Collective requirement.What are the main and sub modules in SAP? MM. SAP can be fit it any language. getting apporvals from functional consultant and PM. Checking group 01 and 02 are maintained on the material master. 02. It is used to get exact data with a fraction of section which will be use fully for management to take correct decision in a .Handling customization. System stores all req and passes on to the MRP in MRP run. configuration. 3.assitance to functioal consultant.Handling tickets on Day to Day basis . .In this system performance is high however you can not do the backorder processing whereas in other you can do.ABAP 4.FICO.What are the responsibilities of a functional consultant in an implementation project? a) Responsibilities in implemention project .Vishwajit Interview Question and Answers on SAP SD 1.Changing existing configuration whenever needed.Designing a road map and setting approval from client. and enhancement related issues . . 01 . b)Responsibilities in support project .What are the responsibilities of a technical consultant in an implementation project? Preparation of techinical specifications.Individual requirement -For this system generates transfers the requirement for each order to the MRP .Preparing functional specification documents .

Some SAP SD Interview Questions 1 1.Explain the business flow of an implementation project? . This is called as fit gap analysis. 9.Business blue prints .Realization .Support 6. 5.Explain your functional experience prior to SAP? For this yo will give explanation depends of your previous experience. Therefore. Automatiaclly detremine the freight while pricing in ship doc. There should be a gap. and the user will be able to acess instance reports using the logistic informaion systems in SAP.Can you explain the modern technologies in SAP? Do you use this in your current project? I think the ans is APO.Fit gap analysis . usually automatic posting is posting of documents to FICO based on variuos account keys and account groups. investing on middle management will become less. if its wrong pls guide me any body.Project prepration . What exactly is automatic posting can you explain? 1.What are the responsibilities of "CORE TEAM" and "FUNCTIONAL TEAM" in an implementation? Core Team are the power users who are selected for the SAP implementation. The Functional Team gather the initial implementation requirement from these core team users who will be the bridge between the SAP Functional Team and their department users with the expert work knowledge. before implementing the SAP all the business data is in the form of documents. we should analysis the gap between as is and is as process 10.Explain the terms "AS IS" and "FIT GAP ANALYSIS"? Business blue print stage is called as is process. Automatic posting could be.Explain breifly about your role in current/previous project? (If you have one) Team member 7.short span of time.Golive . BW. posting of accounting documents to FICO once invoice is created which can also be controlled manually. Using of sap means there is no need to maintain the middle management in the organization because the CEO of the company is able to direct the executives direcltly with the system. Fit gap means. In this stage. 8. So by filling this gap. CRM. . and post to the relevant account to fico. we cannot keep this data as is in the SAP. SAP is able to integrate all functional organizational units togethere and retrieve exact data needed by management. we make configuration with the help of these documents.

abapers client 400. Client landscape : Basic layout : dev -testing.(for regression testing purposes before moving to prodcution. (may it be sales to billing.. Here you define comparisions for the fields at header table and item tables and the comparision fields say SPART"division".. env.vtfl. Menu path: IMG->sales &distr->Billing->billing plans->define billing plan types. 2. the actual production system The clients could be variable and could be created to a specific env. You will bill the customer in different amounts say 200. integration etc. create a splitting rule using VOFM (you need access key to get here). del to bil. You set the start date and end dates if applicable to the type of billing you are using. 500. You first need to go for copying controls either from sales to billing (invoice) or delivery to billing or billing to billing use transactions (vtaa. canada. eg: representing split in invoice based on item category.) Milestone is a billing plan type where a customer is billed for the amount distributed between the dates until total value is reached eg: if the total billing amountis 1000 USD for a year. You need to define the exact "field" in the comparisions both at header and item level that could lead to invoice split. production server ) if we are creating more than one in each server what is exact use of that client. How many clients we will create in land scape (like in development server. functional would mess around. The field here "data VBRK/VBRP" (headre/item)whcih actually is used for splits or combining different deliveries. "purchase order "BSTKD Instance: 5 sales orders combined into 2 deliveries and the split at the invoice would be 5 individual billing with respect to fields PO and DIv. this basicly is flow of doc to doc.Prod. quality server. Can any one explain how we will configure milestone billing . How we can do invoice split depending on item category in which scenario we will use? 4.vtff) all possibilities for copy controls.Global env.other users(like super etc) 3.) . How we will configure export sales in sd (respect to plants assign and sales process)? 4. for trial and error .Testing env. of each sales order would let you create 5 billings.. 5. UK) (for testing purposes with actual master dataas well) . start of month etc.production also .Development env.vtaf. If you have global implementations at different client locations (eg. What time to be billed (end of month. where abap.vtfa. 300 at different . usually a dev.vtla.) -> this is where you see the Item category and you control whether split is possible or not with the indicator"B". say : client 100-functinal consultants client 300. or bil to bil etc. the key here is the field that is different from header to item will cause split at the item level. US. periodic billing and which scenario we will use? 5.Sandbox env. for actaully creating transports(CTS) .2.

631 Can team size be 40 in a project? Is there any generalized team size no. Go to (VOFM) where all requrements whcih are represented by form routines can be maintained. 634. Form routines for prcing and variuos other functions can be maintained form routines are something todo with ABAP code. here pricing). access sequence and condition tables? ## yes Where do we can find pricing procedure indicator in sd ? ## Pricing procedure is where we maintain all Conditions (like PR00. 6. we can say sd people are? ## Team size cant be forty. you need to go to the program to change abap code to meet the requirement. this specific requirement you created will be assigned in the pricing proc. What are some pricing routines and sd functional specs? 6. Some SAP SD Interview Questions 2 Some of the interviewed questions and answers are as follows: What is the movement type you used in consignment process? ### 632. mwst. Note: make sure you activate your routine for its effect to take place. kp00. Once the tcode VOFM is accessed you will see requrements and go select "pricing" again you need access key to create your own or copy a routine. Lets say. determination "requirements field" usaully with a number beyond 600. etc) Where do we assign calender in the master records? ## In IMG screen Global Settings. What is ALE? ## Application Linking and Enabling . Theres no genralized size of team.Generally ABAPers work on it. Never 40 sd consultants work together on same project.intervals as per customer agreement. for any project? If we tell my team size is 40 in that what no. K004. Requrements are available to be assigned where access sequenses are used (for determination procedures. 633. Say you want header price not to have effect the item pricing. eg: 1000/12 for a 1 year agreement and say billed at the 1st day of every month. if SP is only booking order but the goods should deliver in foreign country and for . What is meant by condition technique: can we say it is the combination of condition types. What is the importance of customer account groups? ## We maintain the customer account to maintain payment terms and incoterms. On the other hand Periodic billling is billing the customer for the total amount(here 1000 USD) at regular intervals peridically until the customer agreement is reached.

how it is possible in SAP? ## thru LSMW. for posting the conditions to revelant G/l account like all prices goes to one particular g/l account. What are the customizing settings in pricing procedure for tax condition type? ## Check out the standard pricing procedure RVAA01 .Sales area Data .then customer send the goods baack to company. Link Between SAP SD. The key fields will extract data of non key fields .billing Tab.To see. Taxes. A bunch of data need to be imported. What are incoterms? Where do we fix them? Where do you find in regular process? ## Incoterms or international comm. How do you control entry possibility of condition values at order through condition type settings? ## You can maintain the maximum and minimum value for all conditions. u will find MANDT on top. then go to SE11. these key fields are used in writing any Program or Interface. What is the difference between PGI cancellation and returns order? ## PGI cancellation is done before the transportation of goods. How can you make some of the fields as key field in generic tables? ## Some fields in all tables have a indicator on it. Material Requirement Planning. A huge no. SD & MM . But return order means its already transported reached customer during transit if materil is spoiled or broke or the goods r not delivered as per customer requested date. SD & PP . Gernerally. what is its importance? ## Its better u read Group Conditions in PR00. What is the integrated areas in SD AND FI. MM & FI . those are key fields. BAPI. SD AND MM. if you see after description 2 tick marks.Possible in Batches.MWST. display VBAK.Possible in Material Requirement planning. What is the standard group condition routine in condition type. SD AND PP in both implementation and support projects? ## SD & FI . Also in Credit Management. terms and u find in CMR .which SP is not going to bare the excise and other taxes then the SH party or payer will tke teh responsibity then the tax is calculated based on account groups.of creations are required.Possible in Account Determination.

order probability) KNVI Customer Master Tax Indicator KNVP Partner Function key KNVD Output type KNVS Customer Master Ship Data KLPA Customer/Vendor Link Sales Documents VBAKUK VBUK VBAK VBKD VBUP VBAP VBPA VBFA VBEP VBBE VBAK + VBUK Header Status and Administrative Data Sales Document . reconciliation acct) KNB4 Customer Payment History KNB5 Customer Master – Dunning info KNBK Customer Master Bank Data KNKA Customer Master Credit Mgmt.Header Data Sales Document .Important Tables for SAP SD Sales and Distribution: Table Customers Description KNA1 General Data KNB1 Customer Master – Co.Item Data Partners Document Flow Sales Document Schedule Line Sales Requirements: Individual Records Delivery Document item data.Code se16 and type in CUS_IMGACH table. Before executing customizing task you desire. Execute. Then mark activity. Code Data (payment method. You will see Tcode that belongs to IMG Activity. SAP SD Tips by: Javier . point it and go to Edit-Display IMG Activity. Go to T. Paste IMG Activity and run. KNKK Customer Master Credit Control Area Data (credit limits) KNVV Sales Area Data (terms. includes Delivery Document Header data Billing Document Header Billing Document Item Shipping Unit Item (Content) Shipping Unit Header SD Delivery DocumeLIPS referencing PO LIKP Billing Document SD Shipping Unit VBRK VBRP VEKP VEPO SAP SD Transaction codes List I found a way to know hidden customizing Tcodes.Business Data Item Status Sales Document .

Define delivery types 8.Change Order · VA03 . VF00 .Modify Customer XD03 . VOV4 .Maintain pricing procedure 10.Change Customer VD03 .Material availability Overview 5.Create Order · VA02 .To assign blocks to relevant sales documents type 7. OVLK .OVKP .Billing Others as follows: At Configuration: 1. OVAZ .Customer Account Changes VD06 . VOV6 . VOV8 .Assign Item categoreies(Item cat determination) 5. VC00 . OVAL . VB11.Scheduling agreement change .The most frequently used transaction codes are as follows: 1.List of sales orders · VA32 . VA11 . VT00 .Pricing proc determination 11.Change Inquiry VA13 .Create Customer XD02 .Assigning Sales area to sales documents type 3.Shipping 5. CO09.Display Inquiry Sales & Distribution Sales order / Quote / Sched Agreement / Contract · VA01 .Master data 2.Display Customer 2.Display Customer VD04 . VL04 .Transportation 6.Sales 4. VA00 . Customer Master Creation-VD01 and XD01 (for full inclu company code) VD02 .Collective processing of delivery 7.Flag for Deletion Customer XD01 .Scedule line categories 6.To create material determination condition record 4. V/06 . OVAU .Sales order change · VA05 .Create Inquiry VA12 .Order reasons 4.Pricing 9.Access sequence Enduser: 1. VS00 .Create outbound delivery with ref sales order 6.Sales Support 3. VL01 .Display Order · VA02 . VL00 .V/07 . V/08 . Create Other material ----MM00 3.Define Sales documents type (header) 2.

TAX PROCEDURE CAL OBBG --.List of deliveries · VL06G .Display Customer invoices by line · FBL1N .List of outbound deliveries for goods issue · VL06P .Delivery due list · VKM5 .Billing due list · FBL5N .ACCESS OBQ3 --.Combine your Sales Organisations.Contract change · VA21 .List of sales documents · VKM1 .Change delivery document · VL04 .Display Vendor invoices by line Delivery · VL02N .· VA42 .Change shipment · VT70 .Output for shipments General · VKM3. 1) At SPRO-->SD-->Sales header-->Assign Sales area to Sales document .CONDITION TABLE OBQ2 --.Display Quotation Billing · VF02 .Create Quotation · VA22 .CUSTOMER TAX CATEGORY OVK4 --.List of outbound deliveries for picking · VL09 .ASSIGN DELIVERY PLANTS and thenVK11 to maintain the condition record for the tax rate.MATERIAL TAX CATEGORY OVK1 --. 3) At VOPA--> Assign Partner Functions to your Account Group & Partner Determination procedure .List of blocked SD documents · VD52 . I raise a sales order and is getting a error stating that "sales area is not defined".Cancel goods issue · VT02N .Material Determination Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 1 How to configure tax? Use the following Tcodes: OBQ1 --.Cancel Billing document · VF04 .TAX DETERMINATION RULES OVK6 --.Change billing document · VF11 . Distribution Channels & Divisons 2) At VOPA-->Assign Partner Determination procedure to your Account Group of Customer Master you are using. VKM4 .Change Quotation · VA23 .ASSIGN COUNTRY TO TAX PROC OVK3 --.

Planning -. Item category usage controls. Instead of this the Std system has a reminder . range OBA7 a) KA b) KG c) KR d) KZ *-. Assign number range to Vendor account group OBAS 4. Create a vendor account group OBD3 2. Create 2 GL accounts FS00 a) Purchases A/c b) S.For Make to Stock Task Specifc SD Transaction Codes 2 Where do we maintain "Item Category Usage" at the master level? Spro --> Sales and Distribution --> Sales --> Sales Documents --> Sales Document Item --> Define Item Category Usage Item Category Usage: item category usages which control the usage of an item.Strategy Group. Create Vendor master data XK01 7. creditors A/c 6. Getting a pop-up when the Contract is going to expire is not a Standard SAP thing. range for vendor account group XKN1 3.Maintain Starategy Group We can see Strategy Group in Material Master Record . 10 . Define tolerance Group for vendor OBA3 5. Define document type and no.For Make to Order 20 . the system response if during document processing an item does not refer to a material but to a text item.Steps to create a Vendor Master Data at the client level and how do we extend it to different company codes? Follow the following steps: 1. for example. for this sales manager can follow up the customer for renual the contract. OPPT -.MRP 3 . For this you need to do some programming.but customer want before one month closing the period system should alert with popup box like this contract is going to close. change/block vendor master data XK02/XK05 8.Vandna How to find the strategy group in sap sd? Menu path for Strategy Group is: Spro --> Production --> Production Planning --> Demand Management --> Planned Independent Requirements --> Planning Strategy --> Define Strategy Group. Item category usage can also be maintained via the item categories In contracts we are creating quantity contract and value contracts in that we only put the validity period after validity period that contract will close. Define no.

Prepare a sales tax register J1I3 .Download register data J1IS . Number range can be assign Internal or external. Goto -.Verify and post an incoming excise invoice J1IX .VOV8 --. In internal number range system automatically assign a number to sales document according to number range define in system.system where in the open Contracts and Quotaions are popped up when you about to create a sales order.Post an incoming excise invoice (excise supervisor) J1IF01 .Assign excise invoices to a delivery for sales from depots J1INJV .Remit excise duty fortnightly J2I9 .Shambhu Sarkar SAP SD TCodes For India Transaction Action: J1I2 .Quotation and Outline agreement messages If you want to have different number range for different sales area where the settings to be done.Monthly CENVAT return J1IG . reverse. or recredit a subcontracting challan J1IFQ .Complete. This setting is in the Sales order header .Create outgoing excise invoices in batches J1I5 .Adjust withholding tax Item J1INREP .Process exemption forms J1IW .Create a subcontracting challana J1IF11 . Number Rage are use to define what number to be assign to sales document type.List subcontracting challans J1IH .Reprint a withholding tax certificate for a vendor J1IQ .Capture an incoming excise invoice (excise clerk) J1IEX_P .Change a subcontracting challan J1IF12 .Display a subcontracting challan J1IF13 .Reconcile quantities for subcontracting challans J1IFR .Update the RG 1 and Part I registers J1IEX . In External number range user manually assign number to sales document.Create an outgoing excise invoice J1IJ .Make a CENVAT adjustment posting J1IIN . For Assigning Number Range use T-Code VN01 Choose Intervals ---.Create an incoming excise invoice (without reference to purchase order) J2I8 .Excise invoice entry at depot .Transfer excise duty to CENVAT account J2IU .Incoming Excise Invoices (central transaction) J1IEX_C .Define your number range *-.Process an excise invoice (outgoing) for other movements J1IU .Year-End Income Tax Depreciation Report J1IR .

VL22 .VF04 Incomplete Billing documents .Returns .15 Outbound Delivery Monitor .Invoiced Sales .MC+Q Variant configuration Analysis .SDD1 Display Delivery Changes .Invoiced Sales .VA15 Quotation List .MC+A Customer Analysis.V_NL List customer material info .VF05 Inquiries list .MC(B Sales org analysis-Incoming orders .V.VD59 List of sales order .MC+Y Sales office Analysis.MC+2 Material Analysis-Incoming orders .MC-E Sales office Analysis.Cr.VDH2 Display Condition record report .VL04 Billing due list .VL06f Material Returns-Analysis .Create additional excise entry at depot J2I5 .MC+E Customer Analysis.V_UC Customer Returns-Analysis .VC/2 Display Customer Hierarchy .MC+I Deliveries-Due list .14 Order Within time period .J1IGA .MCV9 Customer Analysis-Basic List .VA25 Incomplete Sales orders .MC(E General.V.V.MC(I Sales org analysis-Returns . Memo .MC(U Shipping point Analysis-Returns .List of Outbound deliveries .V/I6 Pricing Report .Print excise registers Standard SAP SD Reports Reports in Sales and Distribution modules (LIS-SIS): Sales summary .MCTC Sales org analysis .VL06o Incomplete delivery .VA05 List of Billing documents .MCTE Sales org analysis-Invoiced sales .V/LD Create Net Price List .SD01 Duplicate Sales orders in period .Extract data for excise registers J2I6 .MC-O Blocked orders .Sales .MCTA Material Analysis(SIS) .02 Backorders .MC+M Material Analysis.MC-A Shipping point Analysis .

payment terms. an error V1032 occurs. How can we overwrite default types in SD? A: Exchange rate gets copied from the customer master record. However note that for system to create combined invoices. In all other scenarios you have to key in the shipping point. A2: Change the copy rule for orders->invoices and deliveries->invoices to specify that invoice combination is permitted. choose Sales document -> Subsequent functions-> Create delivery. and therefore appear on the same invoice. PO number. the order can be still entered ( with a warning message). then the shipping point will be brought in from the sales order. Q: We can define our own exchange rate types and use them instead of the defaulted types. Shipping Q: The PL00 condition is fine in delivery. Else undesirable combinations may be created by the system. Exchange rate types are to be maintained for the customer in the sales screen of the customer master record. and distribution channel must be identical. 'M'. Billing Q: SAP allows a non-inventory item and an inventory item to be in the same document till delivery but splits at the time of creation of billing document.SAP Sales and Distribution Frequently Asked Question Master Data Q: Some materials have been blocked for procurement and production. 'B' and 'G'. Can we combine a noninventory item with an inventory item in one invoice? Can we treat it as a value item in sales order so that it is priced and then make it as a text item in delivery documents so that it appears in the same invoice and does not split? A1: Make the non-stock material deliverable. but not pickable. Why? A: In order to use the Packing list PL00 (packing slip in delivery) you must do 'Packing' in the delivery note (edit->packing) Q: we have to enter a shipping point while creating a delivery. Pricing Conditions . Even though deletion flag is set for a material/plant level. The above described scenario will only work if all items on the sales order are to be shipped from the same shipping point. Is there a way to block such transactions for a material flagged for deletion? A: Sales Status field in the sales organization view of the material master may be used to block any transaction for the material. Is it possible to create delivery without shipping points? A: When you are releasing a sales order. Both items will carry into the delivery. sales organization. But when we try to print to either the screen or printer.

Pricing and inventory control take place at the BOM item level These can be automatically derived using the item category groups ERLA and LUMF. Customizing Q: We generated a new condition table. Created a condition record. Q: How can we set up to have the VAT# be accepted in the Ship-To Master File Data Control screen? A: IMG->Fin. What else is required to be done? A: Assign output determination procedure to the header of the document and the output type. Q: Is there an user exit to copy the data into planning table? A: Use user exit MCP20001 and include ZXSOPU01.Q: It is impossible to price at the material level (matnr) . (double-click).Pricing and inventory control take place at the BOM header level TAP . Pricing always look for the pref. Assigned the condition to access sequence. even if a price is set up against the material and not the pref. What is the best way? . Acct. Q: How can we make the Customer Group 1 (or 2. If you insert a step with MATNR then the system will first look for the material. ENTRY. -> Field Status: Sales data (double click) -> sales (double click) . Access sequence is assigned to the output type. Standard SAP item categories are : TAQ . When we look up Determination Analysis. 4.Check the radio button against Customer Gr as REQ.->AR and AP ->Customer acct->Master Record -> Prepare to Create Customer-> Define Acct. when a material has a pricing reference (mvke-pmatn) set up against it in the master data. we get an error "Note 524 Access not made (Initialized Field)". Save the settings to make customer GR entry mandatory . Q: We want to explode Bill of Material automatically at time of Order entry and explode an Equipment BOM in the sales order. Group. You may find a step with PMATN as material number. GR. But when we create a billing document. output screen comes up blank for the output type. Others Q: We get a report screen: "Goods issue: Problem Log" during the delivery process when activating Post Goods Issue button. We want to include our own error message to this list if the selected batch is not on a customer defined table. 5) a mandatory field? A: Logistic General-> Logistics Basic Data: Business Partners -> Customers -> Control -> Define account groups and field selection for customer Choose Customer Acct. if not found (use the exclusion tick box) it will look for the pref. respectively. 3. How can we price by material and pref? A: The field used to look up at the price is defined in Access sequence. What are the setting required? A: Use an item category that is configured for bills of material for having a sales BOM to explode automatically.

2. 2.the shipping point determination takes place with the help of the loading group. shipping conditions etc. or interaction. take the scenario of a third party order process. There are many such links between SD and MM. In SAP you will always get integration with other modules. This process uses a purchase order (which is sent to your vendor). 1b. Looking at MM and SD interaction first. goods movement takes place in the bacgground. Also. Here movement 601 takes place. In case of standard sales order. Now the link between SD and FI :1. 2. there is a direct link between SD and MM . Every such movement of good s hits some G/L account. The material which you are entering in a sales order must be extended to the sales area of your sales order/customer otherwise you cannot transact with this material. *-. This movement is configured in MM. MM & FI 1. when processing a customer's payment. This is configured in Account Determination. plant data. to which GL account the payment has to be processed. this movement hits some G/L account in FI. input fields. a UK based customer may have a different GL account to that of an Export customer. SD will interact with FI. Tax determination: In case of a tax determination also. For instance payment of a UK based material would be placed in a different GL account to that of a non-UK based material. ABAPers are there to essential do some bespoke development. a simple process explanation. Also invoice verification is used further along the process to check that the invoice you send to your customer is the same material and quantity as that which the vendor sends to you (but obviously shipped directly to your customer). eg. 4. Billing is an SD function. data mapping (if doing an interface from one system to another) etc. Your integration. debit note. you create an outbound goods delivery to the customer. While you create inbound/outbound delivery with reference to a sales order. Furthermore.A: Try User exit . But SAP needs to know. all the details of the items are copied from Material master of MM. 3. Thus this is a link between SD and FI 3. The accounts posting in FI is done with reference to the billing documents (invoice. MM will interact with SD :1a. fields. When you create sales order in SD. credit note etc) created in SD. with them would be when specifying the tables. This also refers to Material Master. Whenever you create a delivery with reference to a sales order.Shahee The link between SD and MM :1.USEREXIT_SAVE_DOCUMENT_PREPARE Link Between SAP SD. MRP and availibility check related data is also taken from MM although you control this data in SD also.

VA03. Sales Order OR Tcode for creation VA01.VBAP Quotation / QT Tcode for creation VA21. Sales Order – Integration Points •Availability Check •Credit Check •Costing •Tax Determination •Transfer of Requirements Delivery & Goods Issue – Integration Points •Availability Check •Credit Check •Reduces stock •Reduces Inventory $ •Requirement Eliminated Module MM FI CO/ MM FI PP/ MM Module MM FI MM FI/ CO PP/ MM Module FI/ CO FI/ CO FI/ CO PS Module MM FI FI FI FI - Billing Integration Points •Debit A/R •Credit Revenue •Updates G/ L (Tax. etc.VA12.VF02.ME23.VA23. tables VBAK.VBAP Delivery LF Tcode for creation VL01.VA13. tables LIKP.VL02.VL03. tables VBAK.SD Integration points with other modules SD module is highly integrated with the other modules in SAP.VA02.VBRP . discounts.VA22.VBAP Purchase Order PO Tcode for creation ME21. tables EKKO.ME22. tables VBAK.) •Milestone Billing Return Delivery & Credit Memo Integration Points •Increases Inventory •Updates G/ L •Credit Memo •Adjustment to A/R •Reduces Revenue - Tips by: Subha SD Transaction Code Flow: Inquiry / Document type IN Tcode for creation VA11. tables VBRK. surcharges.LIPS Billing MN Tcode for creation VF01.VF03.EKPO.

xd03.Channel<----------------->Division Sales Org controls Distribution Channel and Division Distribution Channel: The channel that is choosen the organization to make their product reach the end customer. Before that.. Out of Home.Cars. Its Triangular intraction Sales organization / \ / \ Dist. The Division in the Material Master is not an Organizational Unit that can be used to . to create a purchase order we need to have material no.+Dist.Health Care Sectors/Departments TATA Motars: Trucks/Bus.(Network) Division: Ex: HLL--------> Detergents. Table is kna1. xk03(display) Tables are lfa1. why do we assign division to Sales organisation not to distribution channel? In SAP Business Process Sales Area= Sales Org. xk02(change) .Heavy Vechiles Etc.To create a sales order we need purchase order number and custmer number.Food Products. To create vendor tcode is xk01(create). After creating sales order using this no we can create delivery note tcode is vl01. To create custmer tcode is xd01. Ujwala Shirsulla *-- Why Do We Assign Division to Sales Organisation In SAP.. vendor no.Channel+Division. Please note it is not: Sales organization | | Dist. xd02.Channel | | Division Division is an Oragaizational Unit.

SU12 Mass Changes to User Master Records. Workcenters in PP In MM --> Inforecords. In the upper side of the screen insert the data and click the button 'carry out a mass change'. CA75 .Mass change in PRT. info record. PO. Pick the fields in their folder and generate again.maintain related fields. CA95 . Then you have to know the tables where the field you want to modify is. PR. etc. Save and leave. . SAP has provided Mass Maintainance for many objects Examples:Material masters. Routings. .Mass change in Reference opn set.SU10 Mass changes to User Master.Mass change in work center. Then in selection pick the materials or use other selection criteria.suppose you want to change prticaulr field of material for all the mateirl of certian plant or all the plant you can do using mass like wise for certian PO value if you want to cahnge you can use mass. CS20 .Mass Change in material master. Mass Maintainance means to change a master data or transactional data in mass 2. It is a field which is used to uniquely assign a material to a Division.Mass change in BOM.s Preqs etc To do master record mass maintenance You can use tcode MASS and then select your Object type or there is few specific mass maint. but you can use MASS also for that you need to select the object type for PO Tips for mass modification: Use object type BUS1001 and generate. MASS is also one of the transactions among them. vendor. What do you mean by mass maintenance? MASS maintenance means . SAP SD Tips by : Ramkumar How To Do Master Record Mass Maintenance Which master records mass maintenance can be done? What do you mean by mass maintenance? Mass maintainance in MM1. Master records mass maintenance can be done: Material master. CA85 . . PO. Tcode is available like for PO = MEMASSPO etc. MM17 . BOMs. There a lot of transactions for specific mass changes. Generate again.

And the serial number is captured for the material. VA01.80 Mass reversal of documents.XD99 Customer master mass maintenance. Assigned one serial number for this material 8.. vendor master.XK99 Mass maintenance. Serial Number Management In SAP SD By: Rob I am following the below step: 1. 6. . . .FOFO Mass release.Sales order Vl03 .Delivery LT03. Pls check for the serial numbers in MMBE and I suppose a program needs to be created by an ABAPer for the serial number to be fetched and a transaction to be created and associated with the program. Profile is assigned in material master record 4.requests. MB51 if check the material document in serial number TAB i can see a message that "The material is managed in serial numbers" So now my question is why I can't see serial number in material document? How can able to see that? what is the configuration required? Whatever settings you have maintained is correct. a screen pops up asking for the serial number. .Transfer Order After transfer order there is a transaction used ZL02 where in the delivery number is entered and on executing. .FOVX Mass processing of offers.IMAM Mass maintenance of approp.F. . Sales order is saved and delivery and PGI is done for the same serial number and material 9. I need Serial Number Profile tables as soon as possible. Here we enter the serial number maintained for the material and is got from MMBE. T377P .Serial Number Management Profiles T377P_T Texts for Serial Number Management Profiles . 2. 3. Assigned sales order procedure (SDAU) and delivery proceedure to serial number (SDLS). Serial number profile is created. MMBE stock is reduced with one quantity 10. . I shall share as to what happens in our business process. Assume there is a stock of 10 quantity without serial number (you can do 561 for initial stock posting ) 5. IQ01 created serial number for all the 10 stock.CO44 Mass processing of orders. VA01 created sales order for one quantiy 7.KE55 Mass Maintenance PrCtr Master Data.

Check Material Serial No In outbound delivery.ESTO status In the warehouse. means . reversal PGI has not been completely performed.. I realized that the status is still remain as EDEL and ESTO. Click the Status of Serial Number Master record. Choose "to stock" The status should be ESTO now. Here go to the address & change the address & the new address will reflect in the output. Change and Assignment Where to change the ADRNR field for a particular sales office? SPRO --> Enterprise Structure --> Definition --> Sales & Distribution --> Sales Office --> Define Sales Office. description of the sales office is stored.". Change it by going into IQ02 --> Edit --> Sp. the status should only has ESTO. do the following steps: 1. Check the serial number and material with IQ03. Is there a way to remove the status "EDEL"? Go to IQ02. Please check your SD document flow if all the documents have been reversed. . In which table name address of the sales office (SD ) is stored.Serial number Functions --> Manual Transaction and make it 'to stock' If the serial number has status EDEL ESTO that means the serial number is assigned to the Delivery. . but this serial number was not assigned to any other material.EDEL (Assigned in delivery note). post goods issue failed because of serial number. transaction 'Goods issues' is not allowed. Supposingly. for the serial no "#162559019S. Go to edit -> Special serial number function -> manual transaction 2. . Table in which sales office data is stored. table TVBUR-vkbur is the sales office . When I looked at the IQ03. Serial number is material specific. According to this status. Once you do that then only this will come as ESTO.T377X Documents Allowed for Serial Number Management T377X_T Texts for Serial Number Management Documents T5KSN ROE Serial Number SERI Serial Numbers EQBS Serial Number Stock Segment EQSE Serial Number Records IQ09 .ECUS At customer site Sales Office Address. EDEL status shows that it is assigned to a delivery.. Also tell in which table. Try it. open.

table TVKBT -. Which means you will go to Sales office. description. EBIV is used to handle multiple assignments in CRM system. 6. 8.table tvbur it contains a field called address number. Set the number range for Deliveries The internal and external number range for delivery are control by the delivery type. Once you run EBIV you cannot go back to SBIV. address and all other data. There are 2 version in CRM Org Model. In EBIV divisions and distribution channels can only be assigned to sales units (sales organizations. Assignment of Single sales office to multiple sales organizations. in table ADRC you will find name. As you know we have 3 Org Units as far as Sales is concerned i. The assignments are on the lower node. those assignments would be deleted once you shift from SBIV to EBIV.description of sales office. At sales office level in Function tab. Sales Org. 5. 1. When I am trying to assign sales office to more than one sales organization 1st assignment between Sales office and Sales Org is getting deleted. a) SBIV (Standard Backend Integration Version) b) EBIV (Enhanced Backend Integration Version) 2.e. In R/3 there is a standard way to maintain multiple assignments among these org units. how to assign one more sales org to this sales office here. 7. We have a scenario where we need to Assign single sales office to multiple sales organizations in CRM. Sales Office. sales offices. If you would like to have these multiple assignments made in R/3 available in CRM as well you may want to go thru EBIV. . and sales groups). Ex: Sales Group 'X' works (assigned) for 2 Sales Offices 'North' and 'South' simultaneously. ADRNR take that field(ADRNR) and compare with table ADRC-ADRNR. But in CRM this assignment is not as common as in R/3 and is not supported thru SBIV. 4. it is showing only the assigned sales Organization (only one sales org). and only the 2nd assignment is available. You can assign as many combinations as needed here. Sales Group. go to function TAB and assign multiple sales organizations there. In the change form click New entry and assign the new sales organization and distribution channela and division combination. 3. If they are assigned to any other neutral Org Units (Org Units without any Org Attributes).

V_TVLK_VUV Assign Incompletion Forms to the Delivery Item Types in SM30 . Depending on the status group you can block certain subsequent activities .VL10: Customer-specific enhancements / user exits 415716 .V_TVLP_VUV Define the Status Group in SM30 . Then you assign the number range for the delivery type in transaction '0VLK' Set the default start variant for VL10 In transaction SU01. These fields do not exist in the list of additional fields in the IMG.V_TPAR_VUV Assign incompletion forms to the delivery types in SM30 .V_TVUVS You use this function to block a document for delivery. tabstrips Parameters. This OSS notes will help you in creating the additional fields :198137 .Transaction VL04.User exits in delivery processing Checking Fields with Incompletion procedures for Delivery Define your incomplete procedures in OVA2. here you define the Status Group to used 2. If you have not entered data in one of the fields in the document.First you define the number range for deliveries in 'VN01'. or pricing etc. There are 3 levels :Groups Procedures Fields -> 1. you define whether a warning message should be issued Assign incompletion procedures to partner functions in SM30 . In an incompletion procedure you group together the fields that are to be checked for completion. Assuming you have created a variant TEST Parameters LE_VL10_USER_VARIANT Delivery Creation Value TEST Text Default Selection Parameters for Adding additional fields to Delivery Due List If you would like to add additional fields to the Delivery Due List . the document is incomplete. You will need to have a user exit written. billing.

the settings only affect those newly created materials starting from the days you set the parameters.V_T001L_D to include/exclude the storage location for MRP. You used SM30 . This will prevent delivery with zero lines from being created. Sailendra . there is a field Check Quantity 0. Problem in Shipping I am new to SD. Set the value to B or C. Avoiding delivery creation when items quantity are zero Deliveries are created collectively using VL10. you do not want to create the delivery then you have to used the user exit USEREXIT_SAVE_DOCUMENT_PREPARE. In the definition of delivery item category 0VLP.for the document. Press "post goods Issue" I am facing this problem: "The number range for the transaction/event WL in year 2004 does not exist" How to solve this problem. I am facing a problem in Shipping. Exclude inventory in Storage Locations during Delivery Creation When you exclude MRP planning for a storage location. SAP will not consider the stocks when you do a delivery creation. For those materials already created. if you want to include zero quantity items but if they are all zero.V_T001L_D. If you does not wish to include/exclude the storage location for all the materials. For every field in the procedure you also have to define whether a warning message should be issued during processing if no data is entered in this field. and go to change mode of delivery. However. you have to changed it manually one by one or write an ABAP program to mass changed it automatically. Take note that when you set the parameters in SM30 . you can just goto MM02 -> MRP View 4 to include/exclude it for that particular materials only. After finishing the transfer order.

Then click on Change Groups. Put the no Range object as MATBELEG and click on Number Ranges. . When a SO is created and Delivery then we proceed to Transfer order and Post goods issue.Is there a way to solve this problem in Deliveries? Pritam When creating a Sales Order. the system first determines the Delivering Plant in the sequence from the following source: 1) Customer-material info record 2) Customer Master 3) Material Master. Plant and Shipping point in Delivery. On this you can maintain the desired number range. Hope the above has clarified your querries. After selecting click on the change/maintain button.. Here you can put the year as 2004 or any future year. Then select the second row (which includes your WL doc type). Could you Kindly clarify whether Shipping point is assigned to the Material in Material Master or you can assign the Storage Location. Amol.. Also If a Plant has mutliple shipping points.which one will be assigned for shipping after Delivery created I also had an error log while creating Transfer order LT03 saying Postings not possible for specified date. sometimes there is a problem in Shipping. the system determines the shipping point with the customising that you do in Logistics Execution > Shipping > Basic Shiping Funct > Shipping point and Goods Recieving Point Determination > Assign Shipping points : Here you enter the Shipping point to be determined for the combination of: a) Shipping Condition (which is assigned in the customer master or Salesdocument type) b) Loading group (which is assigned in the material master) c) Delivering Plant (which has already been determined) As regards storage location the same is determined in the delivery from the combination 1) Shipping Point 2) Delivering Plant 3) Storage condition.Go to TCode SNRO. On determining the Delivering plant.

S ystem is showing the error "Delivery type ZINC cannot be invoiced with billing type F2 ". IMG/ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE/ASSIGNMENT/LOG GENERAL/ ASSIGN PLANT TO CO CODE. OB52. When I click the post goods issue. You go to assign plant to company code and there you de-assign and save it. I could not proceed with the Post goods issue. and Update your Posting Period as you desire. Now you go to /NOMSY and go to position give company code then change the year to 2007 and pd to 03(now March month)and save it. in T-Code MB1C What actual movement date you used for PG Received into your plant.doc type or customer master record of sold-to party) +loading group of Material master+ delivering plant of .Movement Type Posting Error In Delivery After creating the delivery. Shipping point determination-shipping conditions from (Img of S."CO-code". See there is may be two kind of problem: Maybe your system installed in back date so check actual movement date. the bottom message says posting period possible for 2006/6 and 2006/7 for company code. again you assign your plant to company code and save it. Check for Sales Order . everything will be ok. Now. Then do your work. Just go to sales Document Type (VOV8). it is not allowing to make the final invoice. The system automatically proposes the shipping point at item level. Shipping points is determined for each order item in sales order.Akhilesh Shipping Conditions and Storage Location Determination Can we configure Shipping conditions at line item level? Shipping conditions is one of the criteria to determine shipping points. *-.Shambhu I have created the outbound delivery and have done PGI & made factory invoice but when I try to make the final invoice . and Update your Posting Period as you desire => Open and Close Posting Period. *-. for assigning a posting period do the following T-Code OB52 ("please check your Company Code is assign to which Varriant T-code OBBP") Customizing => Financial Accounting => Financial Global Setting => Document => Posting Period => Open and Close Posting Period. *-Ratnakar While creating material stock. You can change shipping point manually in the order.> Delivery Type -> Billing type assignment and correct accordingly. I have tried all MMPV. I am getting an error " Posting Period003 2007 is not open". OMSY but still stock is not creating. Secondly.

You can also use the customer exit in SAP enhancement V02V0002 to implement storage location determination. and the storage condition for the material as defined in the material master. 1. 3. the delivering plant.You will have as many shipping points for as shipping conditions. 2.RETA and MARE: These rules are mainly used in trade scenarios.you have to define all shipping conditions and assign Shipping points for each shipping conditions. Otherwise. The following data may cause to split as two deliveries: --> Check the shipping points of the two items it may be different.If storage location for picking is not specified in the order item. --> Check the shipping conditions are different for the two items. --> Check the item level partner functions in the Sales order is there different ship to parties available for the two items. --> Check the loading group of the two items.The system determines the picking location based on a rule defined in the delivery type. .Delivery split because of conflicting header data (TRAGR 0001<>0002). --> Check the Delivering plant of the items. If it is not assigned it is proposed from master record of sold-to-party. *-. Customizing : Shipping point determination-IMG-Logistic execution-shipping-basic shipping function. .Vrajesh How system determines storage location in sd? . Check whether the above data are same for all the line items.MALA: The picking location is determined based on the shipping point. the system determines the storage location when it creates the outbound delivery and copies it into the delivery item. . Different routes for line items. Delivery Split Because Of Conflicting Header Data By: Robin Item 000020 . the storage location entered in the order item is used in the outbound delivery. . Different ship to parties for line items. . In your case. The following rules are shipped in the standard system: .customer material infor record. How this error can be removed? What is the reason for such error? Delivery split can occur for the following reasons. Different delivery dates for line items. In r/3 shipping conditions are assigned to Sales document type.The picking location search is activated for each delivery item category.

Partial Delivery option will be set in customer master record sales area ----> shipping--> partial deliveries. but in the delivery checked for concatenation it has the value Z1. Route Determination In Sales Order . loading. select Sales: General/Plant view and compare for both the materials what is maintained in "Trans. The KDGRP item field has the value Z2. VL033 Diagnosis Item 000020 cannot be shipped in the same delivery with the other items in the document because the header data (KDGRP) is different. And make the customer group (VBKD . For the second delivery date ( 25 feb 2008). Maintain unique value and then retry.Grp". How to still create a single delivery document? Item 000020: delivery split due to conflicting header data (KDGRP: Z1 <-> Z2) Message no.Go to Material Master. This is not the business requirement. Getting a delivery split based on different customer group at header level.KDGRP ) same for line items 10 & 20 .then single delivery will happen. the delivery dates of the line items 10&20 and make sure that both are being delivered on same date. then the system proposes different delivery dates or schedule lines dates based on material availability. check in the item data the schedule lines. packing and transit. so as you want to do single delivery. picking. for both the line items Please check the below: DELIVERY SPLIT: Delivery Split depends on the following criteria: 1) Ship to party 2) Delivery date 3) Plant 4) Shipping point 5) Shipping conditions 6) Transportation group 7) Loading group 8) Item categories of materials Delivery split happen when the requested quantity by customer is not full met. Delivery split happens because of the customer group also. then in system on 25 Feb we create delivery document with PGI.e on 14 feb 2008 and 25 feb 2008 If the first delivery (14 feb 2008) is created and PGI is done this means on this delivery date customer has received the goods. assuming that stock is available for both the materials. here you can create delivery only on 25 feb not before this due date. this means on this date goods will reach customer after completing the transportation planning. Your problem will be solved. It should be different. Example : A sales order is confirmed with 2 schedule lines i.

Step: 3 .Define Shipping Types Path: Under the Same Menu path---Define Shipping Types Select New Entries and Assign the Shipping Type (e. Select the Shipping point and enter the Country and Transportation Zone Step: 8 . Departure zone or country of the delivering plant. Step: 7 .Maintain County and Transportation Zone for Shipping Point.Maintain Route Determination Path: Under the Same Menu path--Maintain Route Determination.Maintain Stages for all Routes. Road or Train) and Assign Mode of Transport (Mdtr) and Assign Shipping type Procedure group.Define Routes and Stages. Step: 4 . Destination zone or country of the Ship to Party. and save You will get the route.Define Transportation Connection Point Path: Under the Same Menu path--.Define Transportation Connection Point.Define Transportation Groups.Define Routes and Stages.g. 2. Path: Under the Same Menu path---Define Transportation Groups Step: 9 . In Address of General data. ROUTE DETERMINATION Step: 6 . Shipping condition from the customer master.Define Transportation Zone Path: Spro—Logistics Execution—Transportation—Basic Transportation Function--Routes—Route Determination—Define Transportation Zone. Transportation group from the material master. Go to Customer master data. Weight Group. 3. Step: 2 . Follow this:Step: 1 . Path: Under the Same Menu path--.Maintain County and Transportation Zone for Shipping Point.Define Modes of Transport Path: Spro—Logistics Execution—Transportation—Basic Transportation Function--Routes—Define Routes—Define Modes of Transport. Enter the Transportation Zone id. Path: Under the Same Menu path---Maintain Stages for all Routes.Explain the basic concept of route process in Sales Order. By: Kevin Route is determined automatically in the sales order based on: 1. Select the New Entries and Enter the Details Then Select the Routes stages and define Step: 5 . Path: Under the Same Menu path--. 4. 5. The system takes into account the following 4 conditions for determining the Route – .

If the material availability date or the transportation planning date falls before the order date. The country and the Departure Zone of the shipping point + b. Shipping Conditions agreed in the sales document type or with the sold to party + c. The country & Transportation Zone of the ship to party (in CMR) Route can be manually overwritten during a sales order processing. Scheduling takes into account the following times – a. Transportation Group assigned to the material + d. A delivery type can be customized to carry out rescheduling if required during the delivery processing. Planned delivery costs: Planned delivery costs are agreed upon with the vendor.a. Planned Delivery Cost and Unplanned Delivery Cost ERP SAP ==> SD SAP ==> LE SAP What is planned delivery cost and unplanned delivery cost? By: Chung 1) A delivery costs that are planned in a purchase order and are entered in the system (invoice). irrespective of delivered quantity ii) Quantity-dependent amount iii) Percentage of value of the goods Unplanned Delivery Costs: . Transit Time + b. or a customs office before the purchase order is created. Pick/Pack Time + d. the system automatically carries out forward scheduling and will propose a future date. 2) A delivery costs that are not planned in a purchase order and are not entered in the system until the invoice is received. You can re-determine the route in the outbound delivery based on weight (weight group) provided it is allowed in the configuration of the delivery type. Planned delivery costs can be differentiated as follows: Origin of Costs i) Freight charges ii) Customs charges Calculation of Costs i) Fixed amount. You enter them in the purchase order. Transportation Lead/Planning Time. The loading time and pick/pack time come from the shipping point whereas the transit time and transportation lead time come from the route. Loading Time + c. The system performs backward scheduling first to confirm the required quantity checking the material availability on the material availability date. a carrier.

Therefore. the shipping condition is proposed from the master record of the sold-to party. OR) then it will have priority and will replace the value defaulted from CMR. The shipping condition is proposed from the sales document type if a shipping condition has been assigned to it. But system will not search the shipping point while searching the route.Post them to separate G/L accounts The system distributes the unplanned delivery costs automatically in the ratio of the value invoiced so far to the values in the current invoice. You can enter the unplanned delivery costs in the invoice document alongside the costs incurred.Unplanned delivery costs were not agreed on in the purchase order and are not entered until the invoice is received. Shipping conditions are maintained for which partner function in customer master? Shipping condition is maintain in Ship to Party partner function ( sales area data tab --shipping. You can post unplanned delivery costs as follows: . After determining the shipping point then only the system will start to search route. .) Shipping conditions will be defaulted from the CMR of SP. If not. So shipping conditions will not consider two times while searching the route.Distribute them prorated to calculated invoice items . The system posts unplanned delivery costs to a separate G/L account. If a value exists in the sales document type (eg. Does the system takes the shipping condition twice in search of the route? When the system search for the route it will search through route determination like this: Shipping point*(*Sales order)** and Departure Zone **(From the order shipping point*)*+Shipping condition*(*Customer master which you enter in the order*) *+Transportation Group*(*from material master which you entered in the order**) +destination zone*(*transportation zone of the Customer in the order**)-->Route System will determine the shipping point in the sales order based on these selection Shipping conditions+Loading group+Plant-->Shipping point. the unplanned delivery costs do not debit stock accounts or account assignment objects. Shipping Condition Route Determination And Loading Group Where is the "Shipping Condition" maintained in a customer master? Shipping condition is maintained in the shipping tab under sales area data of customer master.

LOBM_VERAB availability date .LOBM_VFDAT expiration date.LOBM_BPRIO stock determination: priority .LOBM_RLZ required remaining shelf life of batch .LOBM_LFDAT required delivery date . The days of remaining self life is based on the customer. This concerns all characteristics starting with LOBM_*.LOBM_QNDAT next batch check date .LOBM_RLZ_PROZ required remaining shelf life as a percentage .LOBM_UDCODE usage decision . shelf life . So for each customer I have to maintain the days in characteristic (Which characteristics can be used?) There is std Self life expiration date char is exist in the system you have to activate that. Shipping condition and Loading group plays a vital part for shipping point determination .What is the significance of the shipping condition and loading group? Both the shipping condition and loading group are useful in Stock transport order. For customer A it should be 30 and for B 45 etc.LOBM_LGORT storage location . Shipping point will be determined only if it is assigned to the plant from the config.LOBM_LVORM deletion flag . determines the shipping point. Batch Determination In Delivery I have configured the batch determination in delivery and it is working fine.LOBM_MBDAT material availability date . These are: .LOBM_BWTAR valuation type . check the Delivering Plant in Customer master record in XD02 & check the shipping point assignment in OVXC. Requirement is that during batch determination in delivery system should only pick the batch for which remaining self life is at least 45 days. But I have one issue in that.LOBM_MENGE quantity .LOBM_KRT required waiting days for batch .LOBM_ZUSTD status . The combination of shipping condition (Master data of customer /Vendor) + Loading group (material master) + Plant. I have created customer specific strategy/condition record. LOBM_VFDAT (tcode is BMSM) This function updates the standard characteristics in the classification system reserved for batch management so that they meet the requirements of any new functions. For the Customer assigned to the receiving Plant.

Inbound) How to run the transaction code VT01N? VT01N is the Transaction code for posting the Shipment document.User Exit for Staging Area Determination (Item) V50PSTAT . for this.User exit for storage location determination V02V0003 . Sales Order or Delivery Number or any other selection. List Of User Exit Related to VL01N I need to some restriction in fields ( Actual GI Date. or else the complete pending delivery gets selected if you directly entered into it. Outbound) VMDE0003 .Shipping Interface: Error Handling . How do you find out whcih user exits belongs to VL01n ? Here is the list of user exit related to VL01N : V02V0001 . Plant. Select the range i.Rough workload calculation in time per item V53C0002 .Sales area determination for stock transport order V02V0002 ..Calculation of Stock for POs for Shipping Due Date List V50S0001 .Inbound IDoc VMDE0002 . after copying other clients . T-Code:Vl01n ).In newly created clients..User exits for creating picking waves VMDE0001 .User Exits for Delivery Processing V53C0001 . Update Standard Characteristics in BMSM and also Refer SAPNote 33396 . .Shipping Interface: Message SDPICK (Picking. Inbound) VMDE0004 ..e.shipping material type/time slot V53W0001 . remaining life LOBM_RLZ. After that Click on Delivery tab so that you can select an particular delivery.User exit for gate + matl staging area determination V02V0004 .In every client after a release upgrade When the report for updating the standard characteristics has been completed. Individual (Single Shipment) Step 2.Delivery Monitor: User Exits for Filling Display Fields V50R0001 .Collective processing for delivery creation V50R0004 .Collective processing for delivery creation V50R0002 .: Selection w.e.After defining object dependencies for standard characteristic LOBM_RLZ .W&S: RWE enhancement . you receive a log in which all the activities performed are listed.Shipping Interface: Message PICKSD (Picking.. Initial screen for VT01N.LOBM_QSCORE quality score from usage decision You need to execute this function in the following cases: . Transportation Point is your Plant from where the material is moving.Batch determ.Shipping Interface: Message SDPACK (Packing. Step 1. It also created the Handling unit for which the material is packed in Containers or shippers. Shipment Type is the selection of Type i.Delivery: Item Status Calculation V50Q0001 .

Note: You create a shipment document when the goods are relevant for delivery in the sales order. The full cycle using VT01N Sales order . you create a delivery. After you create a sales order.LT03 . If required you can pack the material via Handling unit from the PACK Tab or simple go ahead with the other tab i. then Tick the Planning Tab below.  Functional analyses.  Deliveries. The delivery must have a route in the transportation tab.e.VA01 Delivery .  Shipment.VL01N Transfer order . You can see the Shipment Route will flow automatically. Loading End. Shipment Completion etc.  Planning.Step 3. Then you can club different deliveries in a shipment document.  Backorder processing. Select the delivery you required to create the Document and the click on Item Icon next to deliver tab. Step 5.  Standard analyses.  Sales Information System.  Sales and distribution documents. These are the bare minimum required for creation of a shipment document with one stage. Step 4. System provide the Delivery document(s) below the Item Number. Check in. Procedure for creating shipment sequence goes as:  Shipping Processing and Analyses  Shipping activities.  Goods issue. Then you can save the document & system will provide the document number. Then after executing the same.  Packing.  Billing.  Picking and confirmation. Then Select the Forwarding agents name.  Collective processing. Loading Start.

debugged by the support consultant or the team. then the end user will test it in the QA client and after approval the BASIS consultant has to transport it to the PRODUCTION client. 2. The main job of the supporting consultant is to provide assistance on line to the customer or the organisation where SAP is already implemented for which the person should be very strong in the subject and the process which are implemented in SAP at the client side to understand.Low. (Top.VT01N Shipment cost . 3.Transfer order confirmation .High. Each and every seviority as got its time limits before that we have to fix the error. The errors or bugs forwarded by the end user to the support team are prioritized under three seviority High. what I understand is that if any configuration or customization is required to solve the issue. An example: Tickets in SD can be considered as the problems which the end user or the employee in the company face while working on R/3. Tickets usually occur during the implementation or after theimplementation of the project.None) 5. Then it is informed to the end user/customer/super user about the changes which have moved to the production server by CTS process. 4. These are the process. Then the error is fixed.to analyse. Then after testing properly by generating TR(Transport Request through the basis admin) 6. Medium and Low.VF01 SAP Tickets .What Is That? Handling tickets is called Issue Tracking system. Whenever a customer logs a call he /she has to mention to which work group (by name).VI01 Billing . then the consultant have to work on DEV Client.This is the job of the support consultant. The work process in support projects are given below for your reference. The customer or the end user logs a call through any tool or by mail (RADIX). Here is an eg of a ticket raise: End user is not able to . 1.to actuate and to give the right solution in right time. In summary.Med. To begin with . we should give "TICKET" to you for not knowing it. There can be numerous problem which can occur in the production support and a person who is working in the support has to resolve those tickets in the limited duration. Once the calls came to the work group the support consultant or the team need to send an IR (Initial Response) to the user depending upon the priority of the calls. every ticket has the particular deadline alert so your responsibility is to finish it before that deadline. Each one of the support team is a part of support group. The issues or the tickets(problems) which are arised is taken care of on priority basis by the support team consultants.LT12 Shipment .

*Or in details description:* SLA are Service Level Agreements to resolve the tickets by the market. IPRT --. High. resolving time = 24 hours SLAs normally are part of a contract between a customer and a service provider. For example: if your company follows a ticketing process(a ticket is nothing but an environment contains complete description of the problem which contains Short description. problem. You would get some real issues with severity HIGH in your day-day support. What I have given is a small example.1. Low 2. For instance you could have defined the following SLA levels For example: Gold: Reaction time = 30 minutes. BILLING). For example an IT Organization providing support of SAP / other software / hardware has a agreement. ( Without Shipping point the document becomes INCOMPLETE and he will not be able to proceed further like DELIVERY. These are defined in project preparation phase and client would have made an agreement with the company for the level of service. The SLA's are applicable in Production as well as maintanence support projects. You do the change and Request one more Transport to BASIS for QA client. Now you need to solve this ticket. since shipping point determination is not happened .. Medium 3. SLA's has two important time specifications 1.Anu radha SLA's are nothing but Service level agreements.this is nothing but time taken to respond to . Once the change is deployed in production the TICKET is closed. customer contact details.initial problem response time --. Create Sales order for a customer from a New plant . You would analyze the problem and identify that the SP configuration has to be done for the new plant. SLA means Service Level agreement. Medium priority incident has a 3 days time to resolve etc *-. High priority incident has to be resolved on 10 hours. He raises a ticket and the priority is set in one of the below: 1. sreen shots of the error etxc. What is maintaining SLA in production support? SLA is an abbreviation for "Service Level Agreement". In those case your company or your team has to deliver the solution to the customer in agreed time limit or otherwise you might end up missing SLA's. The End user will test the same by creating a sales order for the new plant and approve it. This can be for example categorized based on criticality of the incident. It is the service agreement between a Company and a service provider. Finally. resolving time = 4 hours Silver: Reaction time = 4 hours.) and for each ticket there will be a severity for example business critical issues or problems may be treated as high or top severitie's. you request a transport to move the changes to PRODUCTION. You would request a transport for DEV CLIENT to BASIS. It means to have guaranteed reaction or resolving times for incidents (= trouble tickets).

PRT --. which is just 5 % of Total SAP. The Functional Specification document to create a detailed design document that explains in detail how the software will be designed and developed. It describes the product's features as seen by the stake holders. that is detchnical developement process. The Functional Specification defines what the functionality will be of a particulat area that is to be precise a transaction in SAP terminology.Which has impact on Business and its work flow .Problem response time ----.this is nothing but time taken to solve the issue or problem. The functional specification translates the Software Requirements template into a technical description which a) Ensures that the product feature requirements are correctly understood before moving into the next step. 2.Mahesh What Are Functional Specification in SAP? To speak at macro level that is at projet manager or at senior levels.the problem. Elsewhre organizations combine these two documents into a single document.and contains the technical information and the data needed for the design and developement. *-. It provides more details on selected items originally described in the Software Requirements Template. b) Clearly and unambiguously provides all the information necessary for the technical consultants to develop the objects. The Functional Specification describes the features of the desired functinality. Both IPRT and PRT will be different for different severitie's.have different names 8) Future Impact & Change Assessement 9) Functional Design (Module Wise) 10) Risk Assessement 11) Process Metrics and Many More-.. Let me throw some light on documentation which is prepared before and in a project: 1) Templates 2) Heat Analysis 3) Fit Gap or Gap Analysis 4) Business Process Design 5) Business Process Model 6) Business Change & Impact 7) Configuration Design. The Functional Spec (Specification) which is a comprehensive document is created after the (SRS) Software Requirements Document. At the consultant level the functional spects are preapred by functinal consultants on any functionality for the purpose of getting the same functinality designed by the technical pepole as most of the times the functionalities according to the requirements of the clients are not available on ready made basis.

he identifies the use cases and transforms them into logical and technical views. 3) A business consultant will bring business process knowledge and provide it to functional consultant who in turn used this knowledge to configure the system.Training the end users and preparing end user training material *-Sistla For those who wished to know the role of a functional consultant. a feeling for defects and general a common sense. and it always depends on the type of business which is opting for SAP. performing appropriately and the business flow is complete and correct.Primarily responsible for Handling tickets and application support to the endusers .Writing functional specs and interacting with Abapers to develop any user exits . The consultant documents the settings and prepares proper guidelines that allow other consultants to do further changes or repairs with due efforts. Role of a Functional Consultant in an End To End Implementation When you talk about the role of a Functional consultant in an end to end implementation. Hence. The main duty of a consultant is to transfer external know-how to the client. transforms the essence into an abstract and algorithmic business model.When an issue comes diagnose.Responsible for any enhancements .Things differ from one implementation to another. *-. 2) Functional consultant know more about business process unlike Business consultant. It is not manpower that counts but intelligence. Below is one view: A functional consultant evaluates the demands in talking with the customer's representatives. understanding of processes. During go live he assists the technical staff by testing the behaviour of the system. Then the main task starts: customizing the respective business area and making sure the system reacts in the manner according to the constraints of the requested use case. analyse and solve the issue . The consultant takes care that proper training is given to the users and that the system is usable. After go live he guarantees that the procedures remain usable and consistent in real live situation and proposes enhancements. Role of a mySAP Functional Consultant What are the differences between a functional and business consultant? The difference between Functional consultant and Business consultant are as follows: 1) A funcitonal consultant is able to configure the system unlike business consultant.Note * This documents are preapared in Vanilla SAP Standards -. I think it won't be possible for me or anybody to define everything but I will try to summarize it: . 4) Functional consultant has more configuration knolwledge then Business consultant.Rocky The responsibilities of a support consultant are: .

MM-SD-FICO for example. 2. Mapping and GAP analysis is done for each module. design current business flows. What is the role of SD Consultant in Testing while implementing the project? 2. Flow diagrams and DFD are prepared. Performance Testing . which SAP prescribes but is not mandatory for any company to follow. study current business processes and its complication. SD. gap analysis and configuration is done. Before starting configuring future business processes in SAP. through google. it won't be possible for me to explain it here. 5. Unit Testing 2. Functional consultant is expected to generate knowledge about the current business process. Everything configured has to be documented as per their categories in the form of predefined templates. dates and schedules. System Testing 3. but as per my experience in implementation. all this forms the part of AS IS document. these have to be then approved by the team leads or who ever the consultant is reporting to. ASAP stands for Accerlated SAP. this documentation is called TO BE. System Integration security Testing 4. there will be test script based on that testing will be performed. but all I can tell you about it is that it is SAP standard implementation methodology. FICO etc. They will test whether the output documents such as purchase order. reading it from there won't give you a great knowledge about ASAP but will obviously get you to know the definitions of various term. ASAP. Unit testing is refer to the module which are going to implement. 3. in all we can say getting through with current business setup. 6. some companies follow typical SDLC steps. Sometimes Functional consultants are also expected to prepare test scripts for testing the configured scenarios. 1. which can be also siad as the result of mapping and gap analysis. End user manual and user training is also expected from F. team members. Integration testing will be cross the modules. reporting system. duties. you can find all the steps on SAP site. What is Unit testing and Integration Testing? Testing : the core team members along with endusers will test whether the postings done in SAP is resulting as per the requirements of the organisation. most of the time in Vision format. such as IBM follow some blue Methodlogy. methodlogy. MM. the DFD/ERD are prepared. responsibilities. invoice document are printed in the required format and showing the correct data. it is a simultaneous process. working hours which have been predicided are formally defined.1. The project normally starts off with a Kick off meeting in which the team size. Integration testing is also called SIT ( System integration testing) Testing mathologies and types: there are 6 types of testings: 1. I have seen people defining integration after mapping. 4.Consultants.

3. and you will be testing using test cases which give a full cyclic test from order to invoice. then 3-transfer order. Usually it is done using software.Parallel Testing? Technical Unit Testing= Test of some technical development such as a user exit.g. Most commonly use are Test Director: which is used to record requirement. The test should examine all data involved across all modules and any data indirectly .g. Whrereas System testing you will be testing the full cycle with it's integration. User Acceptance Testing: Refers to Customer testing. We will be incorporating defects that are coming during these testings using different test cases. Mercury Load Runner: is used for performance testing. User Acceptance testing 6. Regression testing is reffered to a test which verfies that some new configuration doesnot adversly impact existing functionality. Regression Testing Unit testing is done in bit and pieces. development or configuration within the context of any other functions that the process. This will be done on each phase of testing. If BPP defination says 5 seconds for PGI then it should be 5 and not 6 second. Like e. PGI. then 2-delivery. So we will be testing 1. The user test model is comprised of a sub-set of system integration test cases. Performance testing is refered to as how much time / second will take to perform some actions. We use different software during testing. then 4-PGI and then 5-Invoice. TO and PGI and then invoice. or interface. A successful test shows that the development or configuration works as designed and the data is accurate as a result.IntegrationTesting . Functional Unit Testing= Test of configuration. We will not be looking and checking/testing any integration between order and delivery.4 and 5 seperately alone one by one using test cases and test data. The UAT will be performed through the execution of predefined business scenarios.Functional Unit Testing . custom program. Security testing you will be testing different roles and functionalities and will check and signoff. A successful test only proves the developed code works and that it performed the process as as designed. we do have 1create order. IntegrationTesting= Testing a process.5. development or functionality will touch or integrate . the test usually consists of a test data set that is processed according to the new program.2. What does the following terms means : . in SD standard order cycle. preparing test plan and then recording the progress. This is an automatic tool. which combine various business processes. like e.Technical Unit Testing .Volume Testing . delivery and TO. system settings or a custom development (it may follow the technical unit testing) These usually use actual data or data that is masked but essentially the same as a real data set.

They will test whether the output documents such as purchase order. then 2-delivery. Integration Testing ( Along with other integrated modules) The 3 types of testing is as follows:1.2. Like e. Stress testing (where lots of transactions are run to see if the system can handle the data) 1. User Acceptance testing 6. Unit testing (where an individual process relevant to a SD or MM etc is tested) 2. Integration testing is also called SIT ( System integration testing) Testing mathologies and types: there are 6 types of testings: 1. Integration testing (where a process is tested that cuts across all areas of SAP). we do have 1create order. We . then 4-PGI and then 5-Invoice. A successful test indicates that the processes work as designed and integrate with other functions without causing any problems in any integrated areas. What is the role of SD Consultant in Testing while implementing the project? 2. Unit testing is refer to the module which are going to implement. I would also note that when a new implementation is being done you will want to conduct at least one cut over test from the old system to the new and you should probably do several. system resources issues. So we will be testing 1. MM-SD-FICO for example. Volume Testing= testing a full data set that is either actual or masked to insure that the entire volume does cause system problems such as network transmission problems. there will be test script based on that testing will be performed. then 3-transfer order. System Testing 3. Integration testing will be cross the modules. Performance Testing 5. Regressive Testing ( Entire Process) 3. Parallel Testing= Testing the new system or processes with a complete data set while running the same processes in the legacy system. MM.affected. Individual Testing ( Individually which we've created) 2. A successful test indicates that the processes will not slow or crash the system due to a full data set being utilized. or any systemic problem. System Integration security Testing 4. 3. in SD standard order cycle. invoice document are printed in the required format and showing the correct data. Unit Testing 2.3. A successful test will show identical results when both the legacy system and new system results are compared. Regression Testing Unit testing is done in bit and pieces. What is Unit testing and Integration Testing? Testing : the core team members along with endusers will test whether the postings done in SAP is resulting as per the requirements of the organisation. SD. What kind of testings that are carried out in testing server? 1. FICO etc.g.4 and 5 seperately alone one by one using test cases and test data.

Functional Unit Testing= Test of configuration. Security testing you will be testing different roles and functionalities and will check and signoff.will not be looking and checking/testing any integration between order and delivery. which combine various business processes. development or functionality will touch or integrate .Technical Unit Testing . We use different software during testing. User Acceptance Testing: Refers to Customer testing. If BPP defination says 5 seconds for PGI then it should be 5 and not 6 second. Performance testing is refered to as how much time / second will take to perform some actions.g.IntegrationTesting . Whrereas System testing you will be testing the full cycle with it's integration. This is an automatic tool. the test usually consists of a test data set that is processed according to the new program. We will be incorporating defects that are coming during these testings using different test cases. The test should examine all data involved across all modules and any data indirectly affected. This will be done on each phase of testing. A successful test only proves the developed code works and that it performed the process as as designed. Usually it is done using software. TO and PGI and then invoice. A successful test indicates that the processes work as designed and integrate with other functions without causing any problems in any integrated areas. and you will be testing using test cases which give a full cyclic test from order to invoice. The user test model is comprised of a sub-set of system integration test cases. IntegrationTesting= Testing a process. delivery and TO. or any systemic problem. . system resources issues. preparing test plan and then recording the progress. The UAT will be performed through the execution of predefined business scenarios.Functional Unit Testing . Regression testing is reffered to a test which verfies that some new configuration doesnot adversly impact existing functionality. Mercury Load Runner: is used for performance testing. like e. What does the following terms means : .Parallel Testing? Technical Unit Testing= Test of some technical development such as a user exit. system settings or a custom development (it may follow the technical unit testing) These usually use actual data or data that is masked but essentially the same as a real data set. PGI. development or configuration within the context of any other functions that the process. custom program. Most commonly use are Test Director: which is used to record requirement. Volume Testing= testing a full data set that is either actual or masked to insure that the entire volume does cause system problems such as network transmission problems. or interface. A successful test shows that the development or configuration works as designed and the data is accurate as a result. A successful test indicates that the processes will not slow or crash the system due to a full data set being utilized.Volume Testing .

Let us focus on how to prepare manuals: In the client side .Expected Result . 2) In what way they are going to make use of the manuals supplied to them during the course of training.Transaction Code . Integration Testing ( Along with other integrated modules) The 3 types of testing is as follows:1.NO. B) All the transaction codes used by end user. What kind of testings that are carried out in testing server? 1. If they get any better job outside they will resign and go out. A successful test will show identical results when both the legacy system and new system results are compared. Gregrobinette What Are SAP End User Manual It is the same for every other modules although here I reference it mainly for SAP HR. Unit testing (where an individual process relevant to a SD or MM etc is tested) 2. Do they have any computer background or not. End Users are not permanent. That is why implementing company( Client ) expects SAP Consultants to prepare documents which are self explanatory (even to a layman in SAP) and study themselves and use the sap easy access very comfortably. Stress testing (where lots of transactions are run to see if the system can handle the data) Tips by: Teresa Pittari. Individual Testing ( Individually which we've created) 2. 3. 1) You should understand which targeted group for the end-user training is for. again the end-user team disappears after some time.Parallel Testing= Testing the new system or processes with a complete data set while running the same processes in the legacy system.Use of the Code . Hence we should prepare a document which explains the following things comfortably: A) All the buttons and Screens we have in sap and its importance for an end-user. Regressive Testing ( Entire Process) 3. .Navigation path . Integration testing (where a process is tested that cuts across all areas of SAP). I would also note that when a new implementation is being done you will want to conduct at least one cut over test from the old system to the new and you should probably do several. C) The STEP by STEP usage methodology with screen shots and explanatory foot notes for each Transaction code. D) Prepare a book a table and columns which should have the following information: . Even if you train them well.Sl.

but merely the opinions of a few agents that we asked. Like this whatever comes across in SAP Easy Access should be insisted through the training of end users. F) Every consultant is aware that the entire Organsiational Management is with end user only.Achieved Result . Like this each consultant should focus on end user training and prepare the documents. Personnel Area And Sub Area etc. *-. I) Demo. PA40 etc. now the end-user in a position to understand which employee group and subgroup. at good rates. 1.. even taking into account offshore outsourcing and Fast Track Visa Workers.Somasekhar The top ten IT skills to have for the next few years This is not a scientific survey. exercises and solutions should be provided in the manuals. don't worry. We should explain each sub field like Emp Group. Skills on the Up We polled a number of agents and other sources of information and came up with the following skills that are likely to be on the up over the next few years.. Project Management . but merely the opinions of a few agents.Net 3. J) Glossary of terms and expansion of Acronyms. I'm sure if we'd polled others the list might have been slightly different. G) We should inform the importance of info types and usage for our purposes at expert mode. H) Each field in the international infotypes should be explained very clearly and ensure that they are comfortable with the fields of infotypes which have been configured for their company. PA30. You just place them at one place and publish it for their usage in future for any of their new joinees as an end-user.. C# 4.user and give the solutions (ready to use) These problems you can come across while giving the in house training for the endusers. .Remarks/Any Comment E) Highlight the common troubles during the usage of SAP by an end. For example : info type 0001 Org Assignment insists about the three structures of the HR. Means consultant should train the end user in entire OM. If you have a highly valued skill that isn't on here.user point of view . Anyone with these skills is likely to be employed.. Abbreviations should be given. Personnel Area and Sub Area and its importance and relevance to their company so as to understand while processing them from the end. J2EE 2. this is not definitive. When an employee is hired into the company . Emp Sub Group. should allotted.

Those where you might find it a bit of a struggle in the next few years are the skills from before the previous downturn like Cobol. NT Novell 10. but we thought it would be worthwhile to pass on what agents believe to be the skills that they think they will be looking for more and more in the next few years. and is also expected to gain even more market share in the coming years. As I said at the start. VB. Business Analysis 8.5. Recently a client asked me what I would consider to be the five most important things one should consider before embarking on an implementation. This isn't a simple . Siebel also gained an honourable mention. Unix and C++ are still the most sought after skills currently. Get it wrong and the vendor may get paid late or have to resort to lawyers to get paid and tarnish their reputation. Business Analysts are also less immune to offshore outsourcing. SAP 7. DB2 etc. be late or cost a more than budgeted for and take management will take their eye off running their business. There is still quite a lively market for PL/I though. and anyone who has them should stand in good stead. Oracle continues to be very strong. CICS. as they have to remain reasonably close to the business users. Honourable Mentions Other skills that also received honourable mention for the future are some of those from before the downturn such as:SQL Unix C++ VB Access ASP In fact SQL. Oracle 8 and 9i 6.net 9. It's good to see Project Management up there. Java New Hot Skills The top three are definitely becoming very hot skills. SAP continues to do well and is taking market share from its rivals. Successfully Implementing SAP Implementing a package can be a traumatic affair for both the customer and the vendor. For the company the new package may not work the way they expected. It is a much underrated skill. this is not a definitive list.

GAP must be closed and customised software can be developed close the gap.question. implement the software in the best way possible for the organisation set up and tune the software for the particular technical environment. Early involvement by the end users is absolutely necessary. Set up a Project Board. In simple terms: Gap means small cracks. A gap is sometimes spoken of as "the space between where we are and where we want to be. train the users to ensure implementations is smooth as possible into the business. apply any software fixes from the vendor. Train the users. change team and technicians. as they will be the ones living with the system for hopefully many years to come. My top five factors to consider would be: 1. key users and the vendor. Complete the GAP Analysis. 4. existing system or legacy system with Client and new is SAP). GAP Analysis A through gap analysis will identify the gaps between how the business operates ad its needs against what the package can can't do. In information technology. They will want to feel involved in its implementation. gap analysis is the study of the differences between two different information systems or applications( ex. The Change Team will identify the gaps between the package and the business requirements. moves from stage to stage with all the deliverables being signed off is resourced properly. Actual gap analysis is time consuming and it plays vital role in blue print stage. The Project Board will meet regularly to ensure that the project plans are created and being executed as planned. GAP does not need to be closed. 3. The Technical Team will prepare the systems environment for the package. although there are many factors to think about after some consideration for me the top five are way ahead of the others. 5. The Project Board will consist of the stakeholders. The Resources Three types of resources are absolutely necessary -. Buy in from the end users of the system is absolutely essential if the system is to have a long and stable life in any organisation. Have detailed Cut Over Plans. In SAP world. The Project Board is part of the governance of the project. 2. often for the purpose of determining how to get from one state to a new state. re-engineer some of the businesses process to cope with the package.end users. Secure the resources. Taking each one in turn: The Project Board The correct set up and operation of the Project Board in my view is major factor in the success failure of the project. . For each gap there will be one of three outcomes which must be recorded and actioned. GAP must be closed but software cannot be written therefore a workaround is required." Gap analysis is undertaken as a means of bridging that space.

Cut Over Plans Detailed plans need to be developed for cutting over from the old system(s) to the new. Therefore the more effort you put into helping the users master the system early the better. Parallel runs of what will happen over the conversion period using test data. . Unsupportive users will continually undermine the system and eventually it will be replaced. convert and watch for a period after wards to ensure nothing unexpected happens. Train Users Well trained users will support and defend the system on site.

Master your semester with Scribd & The New York Times

Special offer for students: Only $4.99/month.

Master your semester with Scribd & The New York Times

Cancel anytime.